Confidential --- “Planman”

Typesetting
Rule and Regulations
A Book for Typesetting Professionals
Deepak Aggarwal
Compiled by
Compiled by    deepak aggarwal  III
Confidential --- “Planman”
Contents
1.  tYPesettInG        1
overview .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  2
Input   .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .   3
Project Row Data .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  3
Project supported Information   .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 3
standards of Client .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  3
Process .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  5
task in the Book  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  6
Direct Task 6
Supporting Task 6
Work Procedure for each task  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  7
Analysis 7
Workfow CHARt  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 9
Art Workfow 9
Keying Workfow 9
Coding Workfow 9
Setup Workfow 10
Paging Workfow 10
Check Lists for Production (typesetter)  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  11
Setup Checklist 11
Coding Checklist 12
Galley Checklist 12
Paging Checklist 12
Uploading Checklist 12
other Reports   .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .   13
Quality Analyse Sheet (QAS) 13
Job Tracking Sheet (JTS) 14
Project Detail Sheet (PDS) 14
Grid  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  16
output/Uploading stuff .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 18
2.  eLements of Book        19
overview .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 20
front matter  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 21
main Body matter .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 21
Back matter   .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 22
3.  tYPesettInG RULes        23
overview .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 24
typography .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 25
Character .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  25
typefonts   .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .   25
typeface and typestyle  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  26
Leading  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .   26
IV  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Planman”
Greek Characters  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  26
special Characters (embellishing) .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  27
math in typesetting .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  27
Equations 27
Fractions 27
Superscripts and Subscripts 28
Frances 28
Integral, Summation, Product and Union Symbols 28
Matrix and Determinatnts 28
Ellipses 29
Radicals (Root Sign) 29
Text and Math Slash 29
standard measurement  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .   29
Alignment and Indent .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  30
Alignment 30
Indent 31
types of error .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 31
Printer/typesetter errors (Pe) .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  31
4.  PRoofReADInG AnD PAGInG RULes        33
overview .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 34
Proofreading  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 34
International Proof Reading symbol Chart  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  35
International Copy editing symbol Chart    .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .   38
Bad Breaks .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  39
Common Bad Breaks (avoid) 39
Paging Bad Breaks 40
Check Lists for Production (Proofreader) .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  41
Galley Proofng Checklist 41
Page Makup Proofng (PMP) Checklist 41
QC Checklist 41
Revision/Revise Checklist 41
same Looking Character .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  42
5.  font mAnAGement        43
overview .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 44
Which fonts are necessary to mac os X .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  45
Required System Fonts for Mac OS X v104 (Tiger) 45
Required International Fonts 45
manually cleaning up your system font and Application font folders   46
To Manually clean up your system fonts: 46
6.  CoDInG        47
overview .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 48
QuarkXpress Coding .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 49
Xpress Coding (simple Coding)  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .   49
Coding for Paragraph Style 49
Coding for Character Style 49
Coding for Formatting and Special Character 49
Coding for Fonts 50
Compiled by    deepak aggarwal  V
Confidential --- “Planman”
Coding for Index  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  50
X-tag Coding .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  50
InDesign Coding  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 51
Coding for Paragraph Style 52
Coding for Character Style 52
Coding for Formatting and Special Character 52
7.  XmL In InDesIGn Cs2    49
XmL structure   .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 50
XmL Document  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  50
XmL Version Declarations  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  51
Encoding Declarations 51
dtd (Document type Defnition) .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  51
XML dtd Declaration 51
XsL (extensible stylesheet Language) .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  51
XsL Declaration .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  52
XmL entity .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  52
Root element .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  53
tags  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  53
Child element   .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .   53
Attribute .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  53
Content   .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .   53
Unicode  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .   53
Valid .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  53
Well formed  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .   53
Getting started XmL with InDesign Cs2  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .   54
Importing XmL file .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  55
Manual Layout 55
Automatic Layout 55
What is mapping  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  56
Paragraph and Character Style Attributes 56
Tables Attributes 56
Understand/Learn the other terms of InDesign XmL   .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .   57
Understand the Structuring Pane 58
Viewing XML tags 59
To Show or Hide Tagged Frames or Tag Markers 60
to Validate XmL structure .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  60
8. YoRk’s X-tABLe    61
Xtable’s seven styles of tables   .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 63
style A .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  63
style B .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  63
style C .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  63
styles D and e  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .   64
style f .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  64
style G .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  64
1
1
tYPesettInG
Overview
Typesetting Process
1.1  Input
1.2  Process
1.3  Output
Overview
typesetting
A term that originally referred to the setting of lead type for printing presses or phototypesetting. With advancing technology
nearly all “typesetting” is now done on the computer. In other words:
Type + Setting = Typesetting (Typography Setting)
Before going into deep, we need to learn what is the procedure of Typestting. Generally there are three process in typesetting:
1. Input
2. Process
3. Output
The entire typesetting is based on these three steps. Input and Output are directly associated with client wherever Process is
connected with us (Production Team).
There can be various type of job/project in Typesetting feld, like: Books, Magazines, Newspapers, Journals etc.
Note: Please note that this training is not a complete publishing training. We are not going to discuss on each and every topic
of publising. We will learn only those things which are neccessory to make our work smooth and quality holder.
Now we will learn each step one by one.
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  3
Input
‘Input’ is all the Material, Informations & Instruction which are provided by client. ‘Input’ can be divided into three categories:
1. Project Row Data
2. Project Supported Informations
3. Standard of Client
Project Row Data
The data which are compulsory for design the books. This can be MSP, Text Files, Art Log, Arts,
Project supported Informations
The data in the form of instructins, which are neccessory for design the project. It includes, Specs, Sample, Design Layout,
Templete, Pattern Volume or Tearsheet etc.
standards of Client
Standard Rules & Regulation of every client which are used in each and every project provided by him. He sends these speci-
fcation once. We use these specifcations in all project untill client get changed them. These standards includes “File Naming
convention, Postscript/Pdf Option, Printer Details, All Preferences, Punctuation, Greek Characters, Workfow of Job, Final
Delivrable Format, Description...etc.
t e r ms
Artlog  provides by the client, It contains almost complete information of art(s) of the project i. e., number of each art,
placement design of art. When we create the artwork like Re-draw, Re-labeling the Image or Flowchart etc., we need to
follow all the specifcation & design tips mention in the Artlog?
Design Layout  Most the time client get created the design of the project by any freelancer and then send it to typesetter
to follow that design. Typesetter design the book according to that “Design Layout”. Client can send the pattern tearsheet
also after marking the alteration as design layout.
Pattern Volume or Previous edition  Previus edition book is called pattern volume. If you are going to design 6th edition
then the last fve edition(s) will be called its pattern volumes.
templete (Grid)  Template is an electronic fle which contains all styles, preferences, color pallate, master pages... used
for creating the design. Sometimes client provides it or most of the time we create it inhouse by using the supporting fles
like specs, pattern volume, design layout etc.
sample  If we design all the elements coming in the project in a templete, it becomes sample. In typesetting feld we must
get the approval of sample before starting the project on production foor.
Benftsof samplemakingandgettingapproval:
• Client Satisfaction: If we are not getting the approval of sample from client then in correction round client can mark or
complain for any big design change/alteration. In that case we will not be able to take any extra charge as well as client
will also not happy with us.
• Saving Production Time: By having the project sample, we can save our time in production. As we will be having sample
which is already approved by QC and sample is containing all the elements of book then there will be no more designing
query in the mean time of production.
• Consistency: Sample contains all the element of book. So all the operator will follow that one sample for each chapter or
unit. So there will be no chance of inconsistency in the job.
• Got Extra time: In typesetting feld whatever time estimate is given to client, it starts after the approval of sample. So by
making the sample we get extra time for production indirectly.
• Saving rewrok and Resolving of Query in frst stage.
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
4  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
t e r ms
msP  Manuscript page: The book in typewritten or word processing form.
spot Colours  are premixed special colour, which are available in print market indepently. These are used for saving the
printing cost and for giving the consistency in color. ‘Pantone Family’ is the best example of spot colors.
Remember: All the color are made by the combination of CMYK. If you are creating any color by mixing of these four
colours, project will remain four color project but if you use/add any spot color like “Pantone 3721 or any other pantone
family” then this job will become 5 color project. If we have used spot colour in the book then acording to process of Print-
ing Technology we require 5th pallate for print the spot colour. Generally we work in four plates - CMYK.
trim  The fnal dimension of a book after the printer or bindery has cut it to size.
type  Trim – margins
text  Trim – (margins 1 running head/running feet)
Bleed  An element that extends to the trim is called Bleed.
Sometimes client requires few pages highlited that can be identify without opening the book. In that case on those
pages typesetter use bleed option. Specially bleed is used for avoiding a white hair line in printing when we need to extend
any art to trim. The standard of bleed is 9pt.
Ligature  In typography, characters that are bound to each other, such as “f, f, oe, ae.”
types of Books ?  Sceintifc, Technical, Mathematical (STM), Accounting, Journals, Designing Books etc.
Process
Before understanding the typsetting process we see an example of a local scooter reparing service center.
What do you think according to you “what should be the process of that shop”? See:
A Customer comes to Scooter Shopkeeper, he says “my scooter is having the problem and I wanna get it repaired. Then steps of shopkeeper
will be:
Step1: Shopkeeper analyses the scooter (with the help of his best service man) and take an idea about how much work to do in scooter
and what will be the cost! Then according to the market rate he let him know the exect expense for repairing. This process is called
Analyses and Castoff
Step2: Then Shopkeeper settles the delivery time (according to the customer need). If customer need scooter so much quickly then
he will promise to give scooter on time at any cost. That time is called Deadline. If he get failed to meet deadline customer
get unsatisfy.
Step3: He judges his manpower whether he is having suffcient Mechanics. This is called judge our Manpower.
Step4: Now with the help of his superviser, he ensures whether he is having all the neccesoory tools for repairing the schooter. This
procedure is called Judge the Avaailability of Tools.
Step5: He trys to make the all necessory requirement for getting the scoorter repaired. Like Lighting, Water, Food for his Mechanics.
This is called “Maintaining Atmosphere for Work”.
Step6: Now Shopkeeper tell his superviser to make this work done on time with superior quality. This process called “Appoint the Job
Lead”
Step7: Job Lead who knows the entire process of repairing he judges his manpower strength. He distributes the work to require number
of employee according to their knowledge and specilisation. This is called “Distribution of Job”.
Step8: In the meantime of job work, job lead help his team member and get solved their all problemms. This is called “Supervision and
Leading”.
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  5
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
There is no difference in Typesetting Procedure also. We differentiate the process in three categories:
Owner/Management
1. Analyses and Castoff
2. Fix the Deadline (Give by Client)
3. Judge the Manpower (appoint more employee, if required)
4. Judge the Availability of Tools (InDesign, QuarkXpress, 3B2, Pagemaker, or Framemaker etc...)
5. Maintaining the Supporting Working Condition for all (AC, Seats, Lunch, Refreshment...)
6. Appoint the Job Lead for the project
Workof JobLead
7. Distribution of Job to his colleagues according their knowledge and skills
8. Announce a Work Flow for job for running the project smoothly and maintain the consistency
9. Inform his owner for everthing either complain, suggetion or requirements and status of work day to day.
task in the Book
Now before moving ahead, we will see how many task may need to be done in a book. We differentiate these task in two
categories “Direct Task” and “Supporting Task”.
Direct task
The task which are directly connected with the project/book. These are as below:
MustBeinaBook MayBeinaBook
1. Analysis 5. Editing
2. Setup and Compossing 6. Indexing
3. Proofng 7. Keying
4. Art work 8. XML (for web)
supporting task
The task which are indirectly connected with the project/book
9. Announce a Workfow of job for running the project smoothly and maintaining consistency.
10. Generate check list for every task for making consistency as well as avoding error, improving the productivity.
11. Generate all the supporting records for future reference and multi tasking.
12. Introduce the QAR (Quality Analysis Report) for improving the quality day by day.
t e r ms
Index  is a systematic arrangement of entries designed to enable users to locate information in a document. The process of
creating an index is called indexing, and a person who does indexing is called an indexer. There are many types of indexes, from
cumulative indexes for journals to computer database indexes.
Who can create the Index In the United States, according to tradition, the index is the responsibility of the author. Most authors
do not actually do it. While a few publishers have in-house indexers, most indexing is done by freelancers, often working from
home, hired by authors, publishers or packagers.
How is indexing done? Often at the same time as fnal proofreading is being done by someone. The indexer reads the page
proofs, making a list of headings and subheadings (terms to appear in the index) and the location of each pertinent reference.
After completing the rough index the indexer edits it for structure, clarity and consistency, formats it to specifcations, proof-
reads it and submits it to the client in hard-copy form, on in electronic format. Since the indexer is very late in the production
process, there can be unreasonable time pressure.
editing  is done by editor. He is responsible for improving the languare, remove the grammetically mistake and inorm to
client for any other modifcation in data.
Who can do the Editing Only a person who is having entire knowledge of topic of the book can do the editing. If he does not
have complete information, knowledge of the subject of book he can not improve the language or edit the terms.
6  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
Work Procedure for each task
Analysis
A person who is having maximum knowledge of typsetting process, only he/she can do the analysing perfectly. He is the frst
person. His responsibilities are:
1. PIR: Project Informations Report:- This is the primary report, which are having all the genral information about the
project.
Project Informations Report
Project Number: ___________ Project Name: ________________ Publisher: ___________
PM: ___________ Job Lead: ___________ Level: ___________
Book Title: _______________________________________________________________________________________
ISBN: ___________ Author: ______________________
Platform: ___________ Program: ________________ # Color: ___________
Naming Convention: ______________________
Printer Name: ___________ Final Product: ___________
Mansucript Pages: ___________ Est. Book Pages: ___________ Chapters Count: _________
Cutomer Files Received:
Design Layout: Hard Copy: Soft Copy:
Sample: Hard Copy: Soft Copy:
Specification (specs): Templete: Fonts: Liabrary:
Previous Edition’s Files: Hard Copy Book:
Element of Books:
Cover(s): FM: SO: PO: CO:
Box: Tables: Figures: Examples:

Tips:
Appendix: Glossary: Endnotes: Credits: Index:
Shedule:
To Comp: ___________
Castoff: ___________ Sample: ___________
First Pages: ___________ Returned to Compositor: ___________
Ist Revise:___________ Returned to Compositor: ___________
IInd Revise: ___________ Returned to Compositor: ___________
Printer Test: ___________ Files for Printer: ___________ Archieve: ___________
Specification Informations
Trim: _________________ Type: _________________ Text: _________________
Margins: Top: _______ Bottom: _______ Inside: _______ Outside: _______
Lines Per Page/base fonts: _________________________________________________________________
Fonts Used: ________________________________________________________________________________
Special Comments:
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
-________________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  7
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
2. PAR: Project Analysis Report:- This report tells about the numer of msp, total fotting elements.
3. Tagging:- All the tag/style should have marked on
MSP throughout so that production person can apply
the correct tage.
If client has provided only pattern volume’s hard
copy, then analyser need to be mark confguration of
style also.
4. Queries: Generate the Queries for client i.e.,
• MSP 20 is missing.
• MSP 124 is not elegible for reading.
5. ChapterWiseFolder: Generate the Folder for each chapter. Keep all related test msp/art msp in it.
6. CreateJobFolder: At last he create the Job/Mail folder, enclosed all reports with mails and paas it to production.
Now we will learn about :
1. Workfow
2. Checklist
3. Other Reports
t e r ms
jacket  Short for “dust jacket,” this is the paper cover/plastic cover on a book for keeping book clean.
spine  Back of the book visible when book is on a shelf (closed). It show the width of book.
line art  Black and white artwork such as pen-and-ink or pencil drawings.
half-tone  Process of breaking a continuous tone image into dots for printing.
signature  A group of book pages that have been printed together on one large sheet of paper that is then folded and cut in
preparation for being bound, along with the book’s other signatures, into the fnal volume. It is also known as “Pharma”.
Signatures run in eights: 8, 16, 24, 32. Most commonly printers run books in signatures of 16 pages.
blurb  text  Favorable quotes from other writers, celebrities, or experts in a book’s subject area, which appear on the
‘jacket’ and are used for publicity and promotional purposes. A piece of written copy or extracted quotation used, as on
a fyer, in a catalog, or in an advertisement.
frankfurt Book fair  The largest international publishing exhibition - with fve hundred years of tradition behind it. The
fair takes place every October in Frankfurt, Germany. Thousands of publishers, agents, and writers from allover the world
negotiate, network, and buy and sell rights
PAR (Pro[ect AnaIysis Report) Cum Castoff Pages
Chapter MSP IiIe Naming Convention Pages (app) Iigure/Art TabIe Box
Covcrs 2 Cov_pg01-02.qxd 02 0l2 -- --
lM 9 C00_pgi-vi.qxd 00 0l2 -- --
1. 1× C01_pg01-12.qxd 12 -- -- --
2. 20 C02_pg1!-!4.qxd 22 !l1 ! 1
!. 22 C0!_pg!5-52.qxd 1× 9l0 0 --
4. 2! C04_pg5!-71.qxd 19 -- -- --
5. ! lNl_pg72-72.qxd 01 -- -- --
TotaI S0 !2/!! 9 !
PAR (Pro[ect AnaIysis Report) Cum Castoff Pages
Chapter MSP IiIe Naming Convention Pages (app) Iigure/Art TabIe Box
Covcrs 2 Cov_pg01-02.qxd 02 0l2 -- --
lM 9 C00_pgi-vi.qxd 00 0l2 -- --
1. 1× C01_pg01-12.qxd 12 -- -- --
2. 20 C02_pg1!-!4.qxd 22 !l1 ! 1
!. 22 C0!_pg!5-52.qxd 1× 9l0 0 --
4. 2! C04_pg5!-71.qxd 19 -- -- --
5. ! lNl_pg72-72.qxd 01 -- -- --
TotaI S0 !2/!! 9 !
S  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
WoRkfLoW CHARt
Start
CreateArt
1PR
1CR
Yes
No
PasstoTypesetting
End
QC
Error
Art Workfow
Start
Keying/OCR
SpellCheck
1CR
PasstoCoding
End
keying Workfow
Start
Editing
Coding
PlaceinTemplete
End
Coding Workfow
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  9
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
WoRkfLoW CHARt
Start
RTS
1PR
1CR
Error
Yes
TPR
No
PMU
PMP
PMC
Error
Yes
TPR
No
QC
PDF/Preflight
Uploaded
End
Error
No
Yes
Paging Workfow
Start
Analyses
Sampling
QC
Error
Yes
PasstoTypesetting
End
1CR
No
setup Workfow
!0  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
CHeCk LIsts foR PRoDUCtIon (tYPesetteR)
J.No./Name _________ JobTitle_________ JobLead _________ Component ________
setup Checklist
JobFolderStudied/CrossCheck

AnalysetheMSP/Input

GreekCharacters(alpha,betaetc...)

Italic Roman

MathCharacters(plus,minusetc...)

Symbol MathPi font

Base font

MathPrograme

Math Type Powermath

In Math

X-Math

CreateFontFolder

Ensure All fonts are in Type 1 Format

Correct/UpdatethePreference(s)

Default, General, Character, H&J Preferences

Create Complete Style Sheet

Ensure Correct Naming Convention of Style Sheet

Ensure All Styles has been created
Create Color Pallete

Create all required Master Pages

CreateSample

Ensure All Element have Shown in Sample

CreateLiabrary

Ensure All Neccessary Element have put in Liabrary

CreatePrintStyle

CreateJobOptionsforCreatingPDF

CreateXtagfleforCoding(if require)

MarkStylesonSampleforQC

MarkSpacingonSampleforQC

Part/SectionOpener Verso

Recto

New Page
ChapterOpener Verso

Recto

New Page
ChapterEnding Verso

Recto

Any Page
FilesCopiedtoWGServer

LaunchMeeting

SendQuerytoProcessOwener/Leader

Responsible ___________ Date ___________
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  !!
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
CHeCk LIsts foR PRoDUCtIon (tYPesetteR)
J.No./Name _________ JobTitle_________ JobLead _________ Component ________
Coding Checklist
Description with Soft Copy

Pattern Volume

Punctuation per Client

File Placed in Templete

Copy Coded File into WG Server

Responsible ___________ Date ___________
Galley Checklist
Job/MailFolderStudied

Check MSP Sequence

Check Latest Temp/Sample

Document Prefences per Client

Application Prefences per Client

Check Extra Fonts

All Extention Available

New Tag in MSP

Varify all tag Applied

Create all Flotting Elements

Zero Error Filed Area Checked

Stacked Head Spacing

Punctuation, Greek Letters

Global Instruction Followed

Responsible ___________ Date ___________
Paging Checklist
JobFolder Studied

Setup Checklist Reviewed

Check Paging Guidlines

All Art Available

Place all Flotting Element Correctly

Check Bad Break/Orphan/Widow

Zero Erro Field Area Checked

Check Font Attribute

File Naming Convention

Remove Extra Color/Styles

Check Spread/Base Align

Link Art Properly

Responsible ___________ Date ___________
Uploading Checklist
Check Date and Time

File Naming Checked

Prfighting OK

All Font Embaded/Type 1

Art File High Resolution

Art Files are in .eps Format

Last Correction Followed

Zero Erro Field Area Checked

Print Style Correct

AllFilesCopiedtoWGServer

Job/MailFolderStudied

Check MSP Sequence

Tag Missing on MSP

Author Supplied Text File

Spell Check

!2  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
Till here, we have learnt about the various checklist. Checklist are made for improving the quality and avoiding the silly
mistake. These checklist are not only helping us to maintain the quality but also defne the responsiblity of each person. We
have understood the workfow of entire typesetting. We have seen that all department are dependent to each other. If art person
is not doing his work on time than paginator can not perform his work on time. As well as if any person in this process makes
the mistake, everybody’s task will suffer.
other Reports
Now after production workfow and check-
list we will discuss about the other reports
which are made for controlling the tracking,
maintaining the records, imporving the
quality etc... These reports are made by the
job lead or supervisor. We can differentiate
these reports in three catagories:
1. For Improving the Quality and Reducing
the Cost.
2. For Controlling the Distribution and
Tracking of Project.
3. For Maintaining the Complete Project
Details
Quality Analyse sheet (QAs)
Quality Analyse Sheet is introduced by
management person for reducing the errors
and costing in production. According to this
sheet, every person tells previous task per-
former about his mistakes. Means he gives
beedback. So that next time everyperson try
to avoid those mistakes. This sheet is flled
after each component of project.
This is the responsibllity of each person
to fll it properly. It also gives the reward to
those employees who perform their work
with quality. See the speciman copy of QAS.
Job tracking sheet (Jts)
Job Tracking Sheet is implemented on the
production foor for keeping the record of job
distribution. This sheet is updated everyday
by the job lead. Job Lead put the print of ‘JTS’
on the table every morning. Everyperson fll
his name in it and when task is completed or
time is over, he updates this sheet.
In the evening job lead updated these
information in electronic ‘JTS’ and next
day he again gives the print of that up-
dated Job Tacking Sheet. Thus neither he
needs to go to each person for asking what
they are doing nor production persons ask
their work. Everyperson in management
can just see this sheet and get the complete
information of work process and status.
So this is the sheet which tells all in-
formation of project, their current status, total type set pages (TSP), total manuscript page (MSP), Recd date, due date,
responsible person, comments and total of pages on production foor.
QAS (QUALITY ANALYSIS SHEET)
Job Name : ____________________ Job Number: ____________ Chapter No. : _________
Job Lead: ______________ Complexity/Level: _______ Total MSP: _______ Total TSP: _______
Keyed MS (page numbers): : ___________________________________________________________
COD. 1. ______________ MSP: ____________ 2. ______________ MSP: ____________
RTS 1. ______________ TSP: ____________ 2. ______________ TSP: _____________
PMU 1. ______________ TSP: ____________ 2. ______________ TSP: _____________
PMC 1. ______________ TSP: ____________ 2. ______________ TSP: _____________
1PR 1. ______________ TSP: ____________ 2. ______________ TSP: _____________
PMP 1. ______________ TSP: ____________ 2. ______________ TSP: _____________
FNL 1. ______________ TSP: ____________ 2. ______________ TSP: _____________
1PR TSP with Errors: ________________________________________________________________
PMP TSP with Errors: __________________________ Final TSP with Errors: _____________
Desktop Quality Check 1PR PMP FNL TOTAL
T
y
p
o
g
r
a
p
h
y
T1 Typos
T2 Edit Missed/Incorrect
T3 See/Extra Copy
T4 New Mistake Introduced
T5 Art Error
S
p
e
c
s
S1 Style (spec related mistake)
S2
Zero Field Area (CN, CT, Display Heads, RH, Author,
Affilation, Abstract, Wrong Fig. etc...)
S3 Alignment in Table (TCH, TB)
P
G

M

k
p P1 Bad Breaks, Orphan, Widow
P2 Position of Figure and Table
P3 Wrong Paging
Remarks: This Component was finalised in

1PR

PMP

FNL
Confidential --- “Planman”
QAS (QUALITY ANALYSIS SHEET)
Job Name : ____________________ Job Number: ____________ Chapter No. : _________
Job Lead: ______________ Complexity/Level: _______ Total MSP: _______ Total TSP: _______
Keyed MS (page numbers): : ___________________________________________________________
COD. 1. ______________ MSP: ____________ 2. ______________ MSP: ____________
RTS 1. ______________ TSP: ____________ 2. ______________ TSP: _____________
PMU 1. ______________ TSP: ____________ 2. ______________ TSP: _____________
PMC 1. ______________ TSP: ____________ 2. ______________ TSP: _____________
1PR 1. ______________ TSP: ____________ 2. ______________ TSP: _____________
PMP 1. ______________ TSP: ____________ 2. ______________ TSP: _____________
FNL 1. ______________ TSP: ____________ 2. ______________ TSP: _____________
1PR TSP with Errors: ________________________________________________________________
PMP TSP with Errors: __________________________ Final TSP with Errors: _____________
Desktop Quality Check 1PR PMP FNL TOTAL
T
y
p
o
g
r
a
p
h
y
T1 Typos
T2 Edit Missed/Incorrect
T3 See/Extra Copy
T4 New Mistake Introduced
T5 Art Error
S
p
e
c
s
S1 Style (spec related mistake)
S2
Zero Field Area (CN, CT, Display Heads, RH, Author,
Affilation, Abstract, Wrong Fig. etc...)
S3 Alignment in Table (TCH, TB)
P
G

M

k
p P1 Bad Breaks, Orphan, Widow
P2 Position of Figure and Table
P3 Wrong Paging
Remarks: This Component was finalised in

1PR

PMP

FNL
Confidential --- “Planman”
NAME & ID F/R RECD DATE DUE DATE MSPs TSPs TASK FOR RESPONSIBLE STATUS NEXT TASK RESPONSIBLE STATUS Next Task COMMENTS
HR002_10 F 21-Mar-06 09-Apr-06 62 71 RTS Deepak Complete 1PR Pankaj In process Art to come
HR002_14 F 21-Mar-06 07-Apr-06 62 52 PMU Raj Complete PMP Pinky In process
HR002_FM F 29-May-06 09-Jun-06 9 10 PMC Preeti Complete QC Santosh In process Title page to come
HR002_BM F 29-May-06 09-Jun-06 9 10 RTS Poonam In process
142 143
HR001_IND F 12-Jun-06 13-Jun-06 29 17 1CR Deepak Complete QC Sudhakar Complete For Uploading
Correction in pages 393-402, 404,
406-408
29 17
LUCIRE F 21-Jun-06 2 2 Sampling Sudhanshu In process
2 2
173 162 Grand Total MSP/TSP in Production:
HAED_002
JOB TRACKING CUM STATUS SHEET FOR 21 June 2006, Wednesday
Total MSP/TSP in LUCIRE:
LUCIRE
Total MSP/TSP in HAED_002:
HAED_001
Total MSP/TSP in HAED_001:
NAME & ID F/R RECD DATE DUE DATE MSPs TSPs TASK FOR RESPONSIBLE STATUS NEXT TASK RESPONSIBLE STATUS Next Task COMMENTS
HR002_10 F 21-Mar-06 09-Apr-06 62 71 RTS Deepak Complete 1PR Pankaj In process Art to come
HR002_14 F 21-Mar-06 07-Apr-06 62 52 PMU Raj Complete PMP Pinky In process
HR002_FM F 29-May-06 09-Jun-06 9 10 PMC Preeti Complete QC Santosh In process Title page to come
HR002_BM F 29-May-06 09-Jun-06 9 10 RTS Poonam In process
142 143
HR001_IND F 12-Jun-06 13-Jun-06 29 17 1CR Deepak Complete QC Sudhakar Complete For Uploading
Correction in pages 393-402, 404,
406-408
29 17
LUCIRE F 21-Jun-06 2 2 Sampling Sudhanshu In process
2 2
173 162 Grand Total MSP/TSP in Production:
HAED_002
JOB TRACKING CUM STATUS SHEET FOR 21 June 2006, Wednesday
Total MSP/TSP in LUCIRE:
LUCIRE
Total MSP/TSP in HAED_002:
HAED_001
Total MSP/TSP in HAED_001:
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  !3
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
Project Detail sheet (PDs)
Project Detail Sheet is generated by project lead. There should be a seprated sheet for each project. This report is having the
entire information of project like:
• who was involved in the project
• how many tasks were done in the project
• Information about uploaded typeset pages, blank pages etc...
This report is also beneftial for calculating the actual costing of project.
ProjectDetailSheet(PDS)
NAME & ID F/R RECD DATE
Uploaded
On
MSPs TSPs
Blank
Pages
Editing/
Coding
RTS 1CR PMU PMC Uploaded Comments
HR002_10 F 21-Mar-06 09-Apr-06 62 71 0 --- Deepak Deepak Deepak Deepak Deepak
HR002_14 F 21-Mar-06 07-Apr-06 62 52 0 --- Raj Raj Raj Raj Deepak
HR002_07 F 21-Mar-06 11-Apr-06 51 64 0 --- Preeti Preeti Preeti Preeti Deepak
HR002_12 F 13-Apr-06 24-Apr-06 48 58 0 --- Poonam Poonam Poonam Poonam Deepak
HR002_13 F 13-Apr-06 24-Apr-06 46 56 0 --- Pinky Pinky Pinky Pinky Deepak
HR002_11 F 13-Apr-06 25-Apr-06 50 63 0 --- Raj Raj Deepak Deepak Deepak
HR002_09 F 13-Apr-06 27-Apr-06 55 53 0 --- Preeti Deepak Raj Raj Deepak Minor editing
HR002_07 R1 29-May-06 06-Jun-06 64 52 1 Deepak --- Raj Preeti Preeti Deepak
Repaginate due to receiving of missing
art
HR002_09 R1 29-May-06 02-Jun-06 53 50 0 Raj --- Preeti Poonam Poonam Raj Minor editing
HR002_10 R1 29-May-06 05-Jun-06 71 65 0 Preeti --- Poonam Pinky Deepak Raj Minor editing
HR002_11 R1 29-May-06 04-Jun-06 63 56 0 Poonam --- Pinky Deepak Raj Raj Minor editing
HR002_13 R1 29-May-06 03-Jun-06 56 50 0 Pinky --- Raj Raj Preeti Raj
HR002_14 R1 29-May-06 04-Jun-06 52 48 0 Raj --- Preeti Preeti Poonam Raj Correction in page 87
HR002_FM F 29-May-06 09-Jun-06 9 10 2 Preeti --- --- Poonam Pinky Raj
HR002_BM F 29-May-06 09-Jun-06 9 10 1 Poonam --- --- Pinky Raj Raj
HR002_12 R1 06-Jun-06 09-Jun-06 58 44 1 Deepak --- --- Raj Raj Raj
Correction in pages 393-402, 404, 406-
408
809 802 5 Total MSP Recd./TSP Uploaded in HAED 002:
HAED_002
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
Top
2p6
Inside
3p
Outside
3p
Bottom
3p4.5
2p6
Type
36p x 48p1.5
1 SPPhotina Regular 10/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
30
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
40
1
2
3
4
45 Short
46 Normal
47 Long
Trim
42p x 54p
Text
36p x 45p7.5
Typesetting Rules.indd 18 6/22/06 9:56:10 AM
Verso
spread
Recto
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
Top
2p6
Outside
3p
Inside
3p
2p6
Type
36p x 48p1.5
1 SPPhotina Regular 10/12
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
30
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
40
1
2
3
4
45 Short
46 Normal
47 Long
Trim
42p x 54p
Text
36p x 45p7.5
Bottom
3p4.5
Typesetting Rules.indd 19 6/22/06 9:56:11 AM
Verso
spread
Recto
!6  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
2
output/Uploading stuff
Now by using Input we have completed our project process and fnal fles are ready to upload to client. All Uploading material
is called output. This can be upload in various step:
1. FreshUploading: This is the stuff that we upload to client very frst time. Generally we upload PDF in this stage. Client
reviews this stuff and gives his feedback to typesetter. These feedback and alteration is called ‘revises’ from client.
2. Revise(s): This is the feedback cum alteration from client. Sometimes typesetter leaves mistake or sometimes client wants
to make any alteration in the stuff, he sends few/all pages back to typesetter for updating that.
3. Final Print Ready Uploading: Now this is the fnal stuff which is now ready for printing. Before uploading this stuff
typesetter ensure about all checking regarding printing. Like there should be no substitute fonts, page size, hi-resolution
arts etc...
4. Archive Uploading: Almost all clients ask complete stuff in the last or after the printing. It includes all project fles
alongwith supporting fles i.e., InDesign/QuarkXpress fles, art fles, text fles, fonts, print style, sample, layout, math
superset etc...
2
eLements of Book
Overview
2.1  Front Matter
2.2  Body Matter
2.3  Back Matter
Overview
element of Books
A book can be divided into three major devision:
1. the Front Matter (also called preliminary mater or prelims)
2. the Body Matter
3. the Back Matter (or end matter)
These elements are presented in the book in an appropriate sequence.
Now in this chapter we will discuss all the element and their sequence.
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  !9
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
front matter
It appears at the beginning of the book. The folio of all pages in FM set only roman numbers (i, ii, iii...). Element which generally
appear as Front Matter are as follows:
i Half TitlePage This is the frst page of the book, which shows only title of the book. Half Title Page always starts from the
recto page and the following verso page is generally left blank. It is also known as “Bastard Page”.
iii TitlePage This third recto page shows the Title, Author Information, Publisher’s Detail/Logo etc.
iv CopyrightPage This Fourth page always prints on back of the title page (means on verso page). It shows the information
about the Copyright Registration. International Standard Book Number (ISBN), Publisher’s or Printer’s Name and details,
Edition Number, Book Price etc.
v Dedication “This book is dedicated to my son”, this type of dedication lines are set on 5th recto page. Following page is
generally left blank.
vii Epigraph In case there is any Poem/Quotation with it source is coming in FM, it will set on vii page of FM as Epigraph
page. Following page is generally left blank.
viii Table of Contents Brief Content or/and Table of Contents shows the content of entire book with there reference page
numbers. This page includes the information about Part, Chapter, Section, Sub-section, Titles and Heading Levels with
their beginning page numbers. Followed page generally goes blank. This page is set on Recto page.
x Preface/Foreword The author’s own statement about the work is usually called Preface. Wherever Foreword is the
statement someone other than the author. Preface includes reasons for undertaking the work, method of research etc...
This page is set on Recto page.
xii Acknowledgement It may be containing the information about those Persons/Sources who contribute their roles to write
the book. This page is set on Recto page.
xiv Illustrations, Introduction, Abbreviations, These are the other elements of Front Matter. Each section generally starts
from Recto.
main Body matter
This is the biggest part of the book. Text generally starts with Part Opener. The folio of all pages in Body set only arabic numbers
(1, 2, 3...). Element which generally appear as Main Body Matter are as follows:
1 Part Opener (PO) This is the frst page of the body text. Part Opener Page always starts from the recto page and the
following verso page is generally left blank. It contains Part Number (PN), Part Title (PT). Generally big books are divided
into different parts. Blind folio is used in this page.
2 ChapterOpener(CO) This is the third page of text matter. It contains Chapter Number, Chapter Title, Chapter Sub-title,
Chapter Opening Heads and Chapter Opening Text. First Chapter always starts from recto. Next Chapter Opener pages may
start from new page as per instrcution of client.Chapter Opener Style must be same for each chapter opener page.
3 BodyText These are the continued page of Chapter Oener. Body text contains the following elements: (a) Headings such
as level A, B, C, D... (b) List such as number, bullet, step, where list... (c) Equations (Text and Displayed) (d) Extracts or
Quotations, (e) Flotting Elements such as Figures, Tables, Box, Examples, Footnotes...
Back matter
It appears at the end of the book. Back Matter is known by End Matter or Rear Matter. The folio of all pages in BM set only arabic
numbers (1, 2, 3...). Element which generally appear as Back Matter are as follows:
1 Appendix(ces) Additional material which is not included in the text but is useful to the reader for clarifcation like: Text
of documents, Explanation to theories, Mathematical derivations, Long list of Tables etc... Heading to Appendix is always
A-head. If there are two or more Appendices, they are lablelled A, B C etc...
2 Referencelist/Bibliography This is a detailed list of author’s work or suggeted readings. cited in the text. There could be
citation or journals, books, conference proceedings, thesis, technical papers or preprint etc...
3 Glossary Details of Technical terms used in the book which are generally set in alphabatically order and smaller type size
than the text.
20  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
3
4 End Notes List of the notes which are cited in the text. This is same like the footnote. Footnote are set page to page
wherever End Notes are set in the last of book.
5 Index A list of information of particular terms/names which have used in printed book with there reference page number.
Main heading of Index set alphabatically. Generally Index set in two or three column.
6 ErrataandAddenda The corrections (if any) recieved by the publisher from the author too late to incorporate into print,
they are generally set under the head Erratum (Errors) and Addenda (add something)
t e r m
Running Head/feet  The headings at the top/bottom of the page, which never set on display pages (half title, title, copyright,
dedication, PO, CO etc...). If it goes to top it is called running head. If it set in bottom it is called running feet.
Each elements in the front matter normally carried the same running head on verso and recto pages.
Verso Recto
Contents Contents
Index, Index
Running Heads in text According to the structure and nature of the book, acceptable arrangement of running head or run-
ning feet are following:
Verso Recto Verso Recto
Part Title Chapter Title Chapter Number Chapter Title
Chapter Title Subhead Chapter Title Chapter Sub-title
Author Name Chapter Title Sub-head Sub-head
3
tYPesettInG RULes
Overview
3.1  Typography
3.2  Type of Errors
3.3  Typesetting Guidelines
Overview
typography
1. Character
2. Typefonts, Typeface and Typestyle
3. Leading
4. Greek Characters
5. Special Characters
6. Math in Typesetting
7. Standard Measurements
8. Alignment and Indent
type of errors
1. Printer Error
2. Client’s Error
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  23
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
typography
Character
A letter, numeral, symbol or mark of punctuation is called the character. Each character stands on an imaginary base line.
TechnicalTermsof theCharacter:
Abcdefgpqx
Ascender
Meanline
Baseline Descender
Cap. Hieght
x- Hieght
1. Baseline: An imaginary line where all characters stands.
2. Meanline: An imaginary line which goes parallel to baseline from top of lowercase (small) “x”.
3. CapHeight: Height of capital letter from top to bottom.
4. x-height: Height of a lowercase ‘x’ from top to bottom.
5. Ascender: Character which extends above the x-height or meanline. e.g., b, d, f etc.
6. Descender: Character which extends below the ‘x-height’ or baseline. e.g., g, p, q etc..
typefonts
Different type of fonts. We can differentiate fonts in following different categorise:
1 Serif Fonts: Edge in the font. Characters with a small lines projecting from the top or bottom of the main strokes of a letter
of character is known as Serif font. e.g. Times New Roman, Baserville etc.
2 SansSerif Fonts: Without edge. Character without serif e.g., Helvetica, etc.
3. ScriptFonts: Artistically drawn character which looks like handwritter fonts e.g., Davis hand, Balleve etc.
4. TypewriterFonts: Character looks like typewriter printout e.g., ITC American Typewriter, Line Printer etc.
5. Monospace Fonts: Each character in this type has same width, which is gererally used to set comuter language and
statement e.g., Courier, Prestige elite etc.
6. Blackboard Boldface Fonts: Character with double backs are often used by mathematicians to indicate boldface on the
blackboard. Generally these characters are typset in bold face. e.g.: , , 
typeface and typestyle
Typeface: The body or face characteristics of a complete font of type. A type font my be Roman, Bold, Italic, Condensed,
Wideface etc.
Typestyle: There are various styles of typesetting the elements such as: ALL CAPS, small caps, cap and small cap (C/sc), Cap &
Lowercase (C/lc) and Initial Cap (I/c)
Leading
Leading: Space between lines is called Leading. This is always measured between base of the frst line to base of second line
(b/b). This is also called the One Line Space. e.g.:
Ag
Ag
Leading
24  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
Fraction/BlockLeading: By adding 4 pts. in type size, we can get base to base Fraction/Block Leading. This is used in built up
fractions (from base of numerator to base of denominator) and in matrices, arrays etc. e.g.:
a a
a a
11 12
21 22





 Block Leading

1
2
Fraction Leading
SolidLeading: Typsetting without giving the white space between lines is called Solid Leading. e.g., in 9/9 pts. The frst 9 is
type size and the second 9 is leading.
VisualSpace: White space between lines is called ‘Visual Space’. In text we always measure from base to base, but when any
fotting element comes with in the page then we need to measure space from fgure to text, or something from te xt to text
also. Conversion Formula:
Visual Space = Leading - Font Size
In 12/14 point typesetting, 12 is Type Point Size, 20 is Leading. So Visual Space will be 2 point.
Ag
Ag
Leading 14
Visual Space 2
Type Size 12
Greek Characters
Greek Characters are very commonly used by authors for expressing the variables. Generally Cap Greek Letters are set in
Roman and Lowercase Greek Letters are set in italic, unless otherwise specifed by the publisher.
LowerCaseGreekCharacter
a 5 alpha
b 5 beta
c 5 psi
d 5 delta
e 5 epsilon
f 5 phi
g 5 gamma
h 5 eta
i 5 iota
j5 xi
k 5 kappa
l5 lemda
m 5 mu
n 5 nu
o 5 omicron
p 5 pi
q 5 vartheta
r 5 rho
s 5 sigma
t 5 tau
u5 theta
v5 omega
w5 varphi
x 5 chi
y 5 upsilon
z 5 xi
UpperCaseGreekCharacter
C 5 Psi
D 5 Delta
F 5 Phi
G 5 Gamma
J5 Xi
L 5 Lamba
P 5 Pi
Q 5 Theta
S 5 Sigma
V 5 Omega
special Characters (embellishing)
Any character can be embellished with dots, bars, accent or mathematical symbols. Embellished characters should be clearly
illustrated. If double embellishment or embellishment under characters or over cap-height chara cters are called for in text,
extra leading is added, if necessary, to clear ascenders or descenders of adjoining lines. e.g.:
ü 5 umlet option u then u
é5 accute option e then e
è5 grave option ` then e
ñ 5 tild option n then n
î 5 option i then i
◊ 5 circumfes command + shif v
ç 5 option c
å 5 option a
… 5 ellips option
math in typesetting
In typesetting it is very diffcult to express the math. Proofreaders have to give more attention which checking mathematical
settings. We generally use TeX/L
a
T
E
X for math setting.
equations
InlineorTextEquations: When equations appear in the text lines.
DisplayedEquations(DE): When equations are displayed with special setting in seprate lines.
Generally we follow the copy editors marking on the manuscript for spacing, alignment and breaking of DE. If a displayed equa-
tion does not ft on the measure and the preferred break points are not marked on the manuscript, we follow the few rules. We
will read those rules in coming chapter (Paging Rules and Regulation).
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  25
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
fractions
When a numerater and denominater are separated by a math slash (Solidus) or horizontal bar is called Fraction. There are six
types of fractions.
CaseFraction: Index size numerator and denominator separated by a horizontal rule/bar is called the case fraction. e.g.:
1
2
SpecialFraction: Index size numerator and denominator separated by a horizontal rule/bar is called the case fraction. e.g.: ‰
Build-uporStackedFraction: Full size (normal size) numerator and denominator separated by a horizontal rule/bar is termed
as built-up (stack) fraction, e.g.
1
2
ShillingFraction: Full size (normal size) numerator and denominator separted by a solidus (math slash) is the shilling fraction.
e.g. 23.
ComplexFraction: When two types of fractions are included in a fraction as numerator or denominator, that is called complex
fraction. e.g.
1
2 3
HeavyFraction: Two built-up fraction included in a fraction as a numerator and denominator is known as heavy fraction. e.g.:
b ac
b b ac
a
2
2
4
4
2

− ± −
superscripts and subscripts
When a character or word appear in superior or inferior position that is generally set in smaller point size than the normal text.
They are called superscript and subscript based on the position.
StackedStyle: If a character is followed by both subscript and a superscript, they are set aligned or stacked on left immediately
to the right side of the character they are associated with. e.g.: g
1
2
.
StaggeredStyle: If superior and inferior are to set out of a alignment, superscript will follow subscript that is straggered style.
e.g.: g
1
2
.
frances
Parenthesis (), Brackets [], Braces {}, Angle brackets , Double brackets and Bars , or are fences. The size of fences may
depend on the math situation.
Integral, summation, Product and Union symbols
The Integral (
x y +

2
1
), Summation (
x
2
1

), Product (
x y +

2
1
) and Union (

U) Sysmbols are collective math signs and can be set in one,
two or three line sizes. Generally in text we use one line symbols and in case of displayed equations it is set in two lines symbol.
But Union symbol will be set always in one line size unless specifcally marked to be set larger.
In text limits are set to the right of the symbol as sub and superscripts. For example,
x
2
1

; in displayed equations, limits are set
above and below. e.g.:

x y + =

2
2
1
However, in case of limits to an integral are always set to the right of a single symbol and above and below multiples.
matrix and Determinatnts
Mostly the matrices are set as display unless the publisher allow spreading of lines in text. The simple two-by-two matrix
a a
a a
11 12
21 22





 can be set in text. Matrices are set in cloumns and rows in rectangular array. The fractions are generally set as case
fractions. The columns in the matrix are spearated by 1 En space. Determinant is set in the same manner as a matrix except
that straight lines are used instead of brackets.
ellipses
Three lower dots or center dots used to indicate an omission (for example 1, …, 5). Center dots are used between operator signs
(for example: k
1
1 k
2
1

1 k
n
) and and lower dots are used between and after commas or semicolons (for example: k
1
, k
2
,

…, k
n
).
26  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
Radicals (Root sign)
Radical Signs ( ) can be set in one-, two-, and three line sizes. The overscore or vinculum bar can be set above a single symbol
or a set of symbols. The bar will be exactly of the same length as that of the matter there under. When radicals with inculum
bars appears in text, 2 pt. additional leading may be added if necessary to clear descenders from the line above. A thick space will
be used between the end of the expression and the symbol that follows.
text and math slash
TextSlash: It is little bit smaller than the math slash that is used inplace of word ‘Per’. e.g. Km/h (Kilometer Per Hour).
MathSlash: It is little bit bigger than the text slash that is used in mathematical fractions. e.g.: 1 2 .
standard measurement
The units of measurement or the scale used in typesetting is called “Pica Scale”
• The trim is measured in “inches”.
• The type page is measured in “picas”.
• The size of the type is defned in terms of “point”.
• The leading (interline spacing) is measured in “points”.
Remember:
1pica 12points 1inch 6pica 1inch 72points
EmSpace: A unit of measurement which is equal to the point size of character (e.g.: 9 point em should be 9 point wide; in
10/12, em space will be 10 pt.)
EnSpace: 1/2 of em space. This is also called as “Figure Space” or “Nut Space”
ThickSpace: 1/3 of em space. This is also called as “Regular/Word/Math/Operator Space”
ThinSpace: 1/6 of Em space.
HairSpace: 1/16 of em space. This is very minor space which is generally used or added between avoiding of characters.
Alignment and Indent
Alignment
Aligning the lines into the measure is alignment. Different types of alignments commonly used in typesetting are given below:
Justifed Setting (Both Side Alignment): When lines are
aligned from both sides.
Ros nullaorem zzriurem endipisim ipit
accum verit ad modionsed dolessim zzrili-
quis nulla faccums andipiscin ulla conulpu
tatummy num acincil irit doles
Measure
Left Alignment: When lines are aligned from left side only
and leaving the right side ragged. This is also known as “rag-
ged right”.
Ros nullaorem zzriurem endipisim ipit
accum verit ad modionsed dolessim zzriliq-
uis nulla faccums andipiscin ulla conulpu
Measure
Right Alignment: When lines are aligned from right side
only and leaving the left side ragged.
Ros nullaorem zzriurem endipisim ipit
accum verit ad modionsed dolessim zzrili-
quis nulla faccums andipiscin ulla conulpu
tatummy num acincil irit doles
Measure
Center Alignment: Aligning the lines to the center of
measure.
Ros nullaorem zzriurem endipisim ipit
accum verit ad modionsed dolessim zzrili-
quis nulla faccums andipiscin ulla conulpu
tatummy num acincil irit doles
Measure
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  27
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
Indent
Leaving the space from left/right side or both side of text into the measure is called “Indent”. There are three types of common
indent:
Constant Indent: Leaving constant or regular/continued
space from all lines of text is termed as “Constant Indent”
Ros nullaorem zzriurem endipisim ipit
accum verit ad modionsed dolessim
zzriliquis nulla faccums andipiscin ulla
conulpu
Measure
HangingIndent: In this case the frst line is set full measure
and the turnover are indented. e.g.:
Ros nullaorem zzriurem endipisim ipit
accum verit ad modionsed dolessim
zzriliquis nulla faccums andipiscin ulla
conulpu
Measure
Paragraph/First Line Indent: When the frst line is indeneted from the left hand margin and the following lines are set full
measure, we call it “Paragraph Indent”. e.g.;
Ros nullaorem zzriurem endipisim ipit
accum verit
ad modionsed dolessim zzriliquis nulla
faccums andipiscin ulla conulpu
Measure
type of errors
When the type is to be set by using the computer, the text elements are usually coded to indicate matters such as where and
how to set Heading, Engironment, Tables, Figures, and so forth. When italics (or boldface), subscript or superscript are to begin
and end; and how much spacing to insert where needed. Mistakes in inserting code symbols may result in errors. Such errors
are usually caught and rectifed before the proofs are sent to the publisher. We can categoriesed these errors in two parts: (1)
Printer or Typesetter Error and (2) Client Error.
Printer/typesetter errors (Pe)
Any error which is not corrected by the typesetter at the proof stage will be treated as Printer’s Error (PE). There are different
types of typesetter error:
TypographicalErrororTypos: Typesetter’s error during data entry is known as Typographical Error or Typos. e.g.: Spelling
Mistake, Missing text.
FormattingError: Typesetter’s error that occurs during data setting. e.g.: worng setting of fotting elements.
PageMakupError: Typesetter’s error in pagination. e.g.: Wrong placement of fotting elements.
CopyEditError: Typesetter’s ommission in following the copy editor’s marking or instruction. e.g.: Inconsistency in Variables/
Fractions Style/Greek letters/Global spelling etc.
Additional erro marked in proof by the client which was not shwon in the manuscript and not informed to the typesetter at
the typesetting stage. All such Client’s Error are chargeable to the client.
AuthorAlterations(AA)
Editor’sAlterations(EA)
Designer’sError(DE)
OffceCorrections(OC)
4
PRoofReADInG AnD  
PAGInG RULes
Overview
4.1  International Proofreading Marking/Symbols
4.2  International Copyediting Marking/Symbols
4.3  Bad Breaks
4.4  Workfow for Proofng
4.5  Checklist for Proofreaders
4
Overview
Proofreading
Proof Reader should follow a uniform standard and marking the proof because that is considered to be important way of com-
munication between computer operator or programmer and the proof reader. Therefore it is neccessoity to have the complete
knowledge of international proofng symbol.
Make all alteration on the proofs; never alter the original matter of manuscript when correcting the proofs. When you fnd the
error, make two marks: one within the text in the exact place whree the correction is to be made and second in the side to the
line in which the error occurs with a proper sequence. Thus, both the mark tell to operator ‘what to do’. (See International Proof
Reading Symbol Chart)
For more than one correction in the single line,mark the corrections from left to right in the nearest margin. Never try to
squeeze corrections between the printed lines.
Proof reader are supposed to follow the original manuscript copy and do not make any changes on his own. Rather the dis-
crepancies may be queried to author.
It is imperative that the person should be familiar with all the proofreading markings before starting proof reading work. Beside
this he/she should have a fair knowledge about the job style, specifcations and other requirement of publisher. Pica/E-scale,
pen/pencil are the essentials tools require for proofreading.
Before commencing the job, ensure all necessary materials are available. This include the manuscript, galleys and specifca-
tions, which should be complete in all respects. Have a quick glance through the galleys/manuscript to see if there is any page
missing. Also, check for obvious blown, fogged or overprinted which is not in the visible condition so that you will not face the
problem in mean time of proof reading.
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  3!
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
International Proof Reading symbol Chart
T TechBooks’ echBooks’ Quark Documents Quark Documents
24
...contd. on page 30
32  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
International Proof Reading symbol Chart (continued)
T TechBooks’ echBooks’ Quark Documents Quark Documents
30
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  33
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
speciman Copy of Page after Proofng
9
Figure 2 Portion of a corrected galley.
34  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
International Copy editing symbol Chart
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  35
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
Bad Breaks
When a word, line, para or page break is not correct and general typesetting rules are not followed, it means there area bad breaks.
Common Bad Breaks (try to avoid)
1 Orphan line: First line of a paragraph set alone at the end of a page is ‘Orphan line”
2 Widow line: Less than 2 lines at the top of the page is not allowed except for any line enditng with a colon and followed by
list or equation.
3 Orphan word: Less than fve charaters, including punctuation at the end of paragrpah is ‘Orphan’.
4 River: White space between words as a column in consecutive lines that looks like a river of white space, which is also
known as ‘Pigion Hole’. This is generally not allowed.
5. Don’t hyphen already hyphenated word.
6. More than two same words or three same characters in consequtive lines in a paragraph is not allowed.
7. Don’t break line before the punctuation. (break line after punctuation always)
8. Never divide units/short abbreviations from its related number. e.g.: 750 ft., 100 m.
9. Never break function from its arguments. e.g.: sin x, cos x.
10 Never break before solidus (slash; /). Break after the solidus and never set hyphen after breaking the solidus.
11 Never break displayed equaiton (DE) after the math operator sign. Break DE before operators and set turnover lines fush left.
12. Never break inline equaiton before the math operator sign. Break text equation after these signs and set turnover line fush left.
13 Wrong word break should be avioded. Follow Webster’s or any other standard word break dictionary for ensuring correct
word breakin.g
14. Don’t break words with less than fve characters. Break after minimum two characters and carry over minimum three
characters or a word.
15. Don’t break the names of person, initials, rank and degree.
16. Don’t set text list numberr/letter alone at the end of line.
17. Never break title, headings. Not use hyphenate in them.
18. Don’t set clash characters, add kerning there.
19. Avoid too loose line when lines show more than En space between words.
20. Avoid too tight line when lines show less than thin space between words.
21. Don’t allow hyphenation in ragged setting (R/R or R/L) unless required by specifcations.
22. Don’t set more than three pica ragged line in ragged setting.
Paging Bad Breaks
23 Avoid hyphenation at the end of verso page. But never allow at the end of recto page.
24. Never allow hyphenation at the end of verso page if it is followed immediately by a full page Figure, Table or any other
fotting element.
25. Never set running head and folio on the opening page of the “part/chapter/article. Set drop folio there if specifcation allow.
26. Don’t set less than fve text lines on chapter opening page.
27. Don’t set less than six text lines on the last page.
28. Don’t set less than fve text lines below a full page Figure, Table, or Box.
29. Don’t set less than three text lines below the H1 at the end of page.
30. Don’t set less than two text lines below the H2 and all other inferior headings at the end of page.
31. Never adjust/squeeze space below the heading to adjust the page length.
32. Carding: Adding vertical space between lines and paragraph is not allowed, unless specifcation permist.
33. Kerning: Adding/Reducing too much (more than 13/23) space between characters it not allowed.
34. Consecutive spread should not vary by more than one line.
35. Never foat unnumbered fgures/tables. Place these elements exctly where shown on the manuscript.
36. Don’t set any fotting element verticle if their width is above 2 pica more than text width (up to 2 pica is permissible). If
more than 2 pica than set wider fotting element horizontal/landscape or verticle/broad side of the page with drop folio
(remove running head in that condition).
36  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
CHeCk LIsts foR PRoDUCtIon (PRoofReADeR)
J.No./Name _________ JobTitle_________ JobLead _________ Component ________
Galley Proofng Checklist
Check Punctuation/Greek Characters

Check Math Style

Check FM/BM Style

Check Style of Flotting Elements

Responsible ___________ Date ___________
Page makup Proofng (PmP) Checklist
Job/MailFolderStudied

Talley Correction Carefully

Check Edit thoroughly

Check RH/Folio/DF thorouout

Check New page or Racto Opening

Check Blank Page (PO, CO, End)

Check Style against Sample

Check Placement of Flotting Elements

Check Citation of Flotting Elements

Check Art and Caption

Check Style of Heads, List, Boxes

Check Spread Alignment

Check Bad Breaks/Orphan/Widow

Check FM/BM Sequence and Style

Check & Update TOC from Final Pages

CheckZeroFieldAreaCarefully

Responsible ___________ Date ___________
QC Checklist
Job/MailFolderStudied

Check Edit Randomly

Check RH/Folio/DF Randomly

Check New page or Racto Opening

Check Blank Page (PO, CO, End)

Check Styles against Sample

Check Pagination

Check Citation of Flotting Elements

Check Art and Caption Randomly

Check Style/Spacing of Heads, List

Check Spread/Base Alignment

Check Bad Breaks/Orphan/Widow

Check FM/BM Sequence and Style

Check TOC

Create/Mark Queries

CheckZeroFieldAreaRandomly

Responsible ___________ Date ___________
Revision/Revise Checklist
MailFolderStudied

Check Edit Carefully

Check Running Head/Folio/DF

Check Paging if Refow

Check Figure & Caption if Repaging

Inform client about Index if Repaging

Job/MailFolderStudied

Check MSP Sequence & Counting

Check Slug Line

Check Citation of Flotting Element

Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  37
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
same Looking Character
The characters which looks similar should be clearly indentifed, such as:
— Cap ‘bee’ (B) and Greek lc beta (b)
— Greek lc epsilon (e) and Math ‘element of ’ symbol ()
— Letter (i) and Greek lc ‘Iota’ (i)
— Letter Cap ‘kay’ (K), lc ‘kay’ (k), and Greek lc kappa (k)
— Letter lc ‘el’ (l) and numeral one (1)
— Letter lc ‘en’ (n) and Greek lc eta (h)
— Letter cap ‘oh’ (O), lc (o), Greek lc Omicron (o) and math zero (0)
— Letters cap ‘pee’ (P), lc (p) and Greek lc rho (r)
— Letters cap ‘tee’ (T), and Greek lc tau (t)
— Letters lc ‘you’ (u), and Greek lc mu (m)
— Letters lc ‘vee’ (v), and Greek lc upsilon (y), Greek lc nu (n)
— Letter lc (w), and Greek lc omega (v)
— Letter cap ‘ex’ (X), lc ‘ex (x), Greek lc chi (x) and Math times sign (3)
— Greek cap Delta (D), Triangular (), and Nable sign ()
— Greek cap ‘Sigma’ (S) and Summation sign ()
— Union sign () and letter capital ‘you’ (U)
Proofreader must take care about these similar character.
5
font mAnAGement
Overview
Using and Managing Fonts in Mac OS X
  How to organize your font library
  Which fonts are necessary to Mac OS X
  Where Mac OS X stores system fonts
  How to cleanup and organize your font library
  The font activation hierarchy
  Techniques to workaround font issues
5
Overview
This chapter contains detailed recommendations and instructions that can help you work effciently with fonts in OSX, confgure
your system to minimize font problems, enhance your workfow. It covers:
 What font types can be used (type of fonts)
 Where Mac OS X stores fonts
 Which fonts are necessary to Mac OS X
 How to organize your font library
 The font activation hierarchy
 How to cleanup and organize your font library
 Techniques to workaround font issues
We presume that you have made the decision to use a professional font manager - like Suitcase. This font management tools are
an integral part of making sense of your font mess.
What font types can be used
1. Mac Postscript Type 1
2. Open Type font (.otf)
3. System or Data Fonts (.dfonts)
4. Multiple Master
(Only Mac OX X 10.2 or later)
If you use an unsupported font format, the system either not display or print the font in applications. The Font will be disa-
bled.
Where mac os X stores the fonts
MacOSXProvidesMultipleLocationsforFontStorage
1. System Fonts: Location: System/Library/Fonts
2. Main Font Collection: Location: Library/Fonts
3. Network Fonts: Location: Network/Library/Fonts
4. Your Private Font Folder: Location: /Users/YourUserName/Library/Font
5. Application’sownFontFolder, such as Adobe’s InDesign Font Folder
6. Classic’s Fonts: Location: SystemFolder/Fonts
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  4!
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
Which fonts are necessary to mac os X
Below is the Chart which shows minimum and necessary fonts which need to run your system and application.
Required system fonts for mac os X v10.4 (tiger)
Type Fonts Locations
OS X System Domain Fonts Geneva.dfont
Keyboard.dfont
LastResort.dfont
Lucida Grande.dfont
Monaco.dfont
/System/Liabrary/Fonts
Classic System Domain Fonts Charcoal
Chicago
Geneva
Monaco
/System Folder/Fonts
Required International fonts
Japanese Fons Hiragino Kaku Gothic Pro
W3 and W6
Hiragino Mincho Pro
AquaKana
Osaka and Osaka Mono
/System/Liabrary/Fonts
Traditional Chinese fonts LiHei Pro
Apple LiGothic Medium
Hei
/System/Liabrary/Fonts
Simplifed Chineses Fonts STXiHei
ST Heiti
/System/Liabrary/Fonts
Korean Font Apple Gothic Regular /System/Liabrary/Fonts
Arabic Font Geeza Pro Regular and Bold /System/Liabrary/Fonts
Remember: If you delete even a single font mentioned in this list either system or internatinal font, your system will not run. And you need
to re-boot your machine again. These are the minimum list of font to run the machine.
Remember: If you delete any fonts mentioned in ““Classic System Domain Fonts”, which locate in “/system folder/fonts”, your classic
system will not work properly.
Beside This: When we install any application, these application place/copy fonts fles in special location. So ultimaetly when
you have a number of applications then you will have number of fonts also.
You need to manage these fonts in your system. To locate and manage these fonts:
1. Create a folder named “Adobe Application Fonts” within the Moved the System Font Folders folder.
2. Move all the fonts that you fnd in /Library/Application Support/Adobe/Fonts to your new folder, except the folder named
Reqrd and the fonts stored within this folder for future reference.
42  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
6
manually Cleaning Up Your system font and Application font folders 
In order to manually clean up your System Font and Application Font folders, it is necessary to remove all fonts that are not
absolutely essential for Mac OS X to operate.
to manually clean up your system fonts: 
1. For Local Domain Fonts, create a folder called Library Fonts within the Moved from System Font Folders folder.
2. Move all fonts that you fnd in /Library/Fonts to your new Library Fonts folder.
3. For User Domain Fonts, create a folder called User Fonts within the Moved from System Font Folders.
4. Move all fonts that you fnd in /Users/[name]/Library/Fonts to your new User Fonts folder.
5. If you have a Classic System Folder, a system Folder that has an OS 9 icon at the root of your main hard disk, these fonts
must be moved. Create a folder called Classic Fonts within the Moved from System Font Folder folder.
Move all fonts that you fnd in /System Folder/Fonts to your new folder, except the following fonts:
Characoal
Chicago
Geneva
Monaco
TomoveSystemDomainFonts,youmustbeloggedintoMacOSXasauserwithAdministratorrights.If youaren’tsureyour
loginlevel,checktheAccountspageof thesystemPreferences.
6. Create a folder named System Domain Fonts folder in your Moved from System Fonts Folders folder.
7. Select all of the fonts in the /System/Library/Fonts folder except the following essential system fonts:
Geneva.dfont
Keyboard.dfont
LastResort.dfont
Lucida Grande.dfont
Monaco.dfont
8. Copy the selected fonts from the /System/Library/Fonts folder to your new System Domain Fonts folder.
9. Press Command+Delete to remove the selected fles from the System Folder. At the prompt, enter your Mac OSX Administrator
Password and click OK.
6
CoDInG
Overview
6.1  QuarkXpress Coding
6.2  InDesign Coding
Overview
In this chapter we will discuss about:
1. What is coding
2. How can we do the coding
3. Benefts of Coding
Here we are going to learn about Coding for QuarkXpress/InDesignCS2.
Beneftof Coding
1.   ·- ÷~ í(+; coding + text +; ·+ì QuarkXpress templete ~ Place +-( ÷ (; ¤;- bold, italic, n-dash, m-dash etc. +; ·+·+ 
+-+ Find Replace +-+; ·:·; ·; ·+ lengthy process ÷)
2.   coding + ,;-; ÷~ +;~ +; Distribution ;¤;+ì ¤ +- ¤+( ÷ í·¤¤ +; ++¬ spcilisation ÷;·; í·( +;~ ~;ì ··<ì ÷; ·;··;)
3 Word +; Find Replace QuarkXpress  +ì (¬+; ~ (÷( ·«;<; advance ÷)
RememberduringCoding
1.   ·- coding ~ +;, ·¤; tag ·; QuarkXpress templete ~ +÷ì ÷ (; ¤ +;~ +; tag ·+ ;· (+ ·;··; ;- +÷ normal style
+ì confgration ¬ ¬(; ÷)
2.   <, > and @ symbol +ì coding ¤(¤ ·÷¬ +-+ì ¬;í÷· +«;í+ QuarkXpress coding ,++; as a character +; ¬+- as a command
¬(; ÷)
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  45
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
QuarkXpress Coding
In QuarkXpress there are two type of Coding:
1. Xpress Coding 2. X-tag Coding
X-Press Coding (simple Coding)
It’s very easy coding. We don’t require any third party extension for this. In Xpress coding we do the coding for following:
Coding for Paragraph style
@TX: There is no need to close paragraph style. Up to next style it will cover all text as TX.
Remember: This is not case-sesative
Coding for Character style
<@StyleName> For Starting e.g. <@TN>
<@$p> For Closing any character style
<@TN>Table 2.1<@$p> you will have to closeup the character style by using <@#p> otherwise character style will used up
to last of fle.
Coding for formatting and special Character
See the below chart for Formating the text and Special Characters
Character Formatting Codes
Wehn these codes comes frst time they’re encoun-
tered, the format is activated. The second time, the
format is deactivated. e.g.: <B>^&<B>
Special Character Codes
These tag takes place of particular word.
e.g. if n-dash is coming in the fle then n-dash will replace with “<\#208>”.
So we can say these tags works like character.
Plain <P> Bold <B> @ <\@> En dash <\#208>
Italic <I> Superior <V> \ <\\> Em dash <\#209>
Shadow <S> Underline <U> < <\<> Open double quotes <\#210>
Word underline <W> Strikethrough </> non-breaking hyphen <\!-> Close double quotes <\#211>
All caps <K> Small caps <H> Normal hyphen <\-> Open single quote/apostrophe <\#212>
Superscript <+> Subscript <-> En space <\f> Close single quote/apostrophe <\#213>
For Formatting and Special Character we have the freeextentionfor word named “ETKPlus.dot”. You can download this from
“http://www.editorium.com/14857.htm”.
Coding for fonts
Sometimes we found the character in word fle e.g.: 1 2 3 4 and other mathematical character of symbols. If we do convert
them in QuarkXpress, it may be a very length process so we code these character in word fle.
<f“FontName”>character<f$>
for example
1 <f“Mathematical Pi 1”>1<f$> a <f“Mathematical Pi 1”>a<f$>
Coding for Index
·- ÷~ author indexing mark +ì ÷, word or text fle provide +-(; ÷ (; ÷~ ¤ì word fle ¤ ·+ ÷ì (;- ~ index entries extract
+- ¤+( ÷ í·¤+ í¬· index coding ÷;(ì ÷) «÷; ÷~ ¤ì +; ¤ì·;·) ÷;¬;í+ «÷ ·+ complecated coding ÷ ·- ,¤¤ +;+ì ++( +ì saving
÷;(ì ÷ ,¤í¬· ¤+; ·;++; ·--ì ÷; ·;(; ÷)
The Xpress Tags for indexing let you insert index markers at the text insertion point or specify ranges of text to be indexed.
In coming chapters we will learn about this coding.
46  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
Quark Xtags Coding
This is the third part x-tension called, “Xtags”. After install this extension, you can see an additional
option in File Menu, “Get Text with Xtags”
Procedureof X-tagcoding
,¤~ ÷~ ·+ x-tag table defne +-( ÷) 
In coming chapters we will learn about this X-tag coding.
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  47
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
InDesign Coding
Placing Directly taged Word file (.doc)
First we wil talk about word fle. If we are importing any word
document in Indisign then InDesign gives the facility to mapping
the style there with templete. Just see the below arts:
1. Here we are just importing any .doc fle named "unit 10
edited.doc"
2. Now see second art. In bottom there is an option named
"Customize Style Import (Style Mapping). If you just click
here you will see third art
3. In third art there is a comparision between MS Word Styles
vs. InDesign Style. Now you match the style as per your
requirement.
4. InDesign automatically convert word formating into the
InDesign.
This procedure is beneftial only if client has used tagging and
formating in word fle and we have to just match them with our
InDesign Templete.
Placing Coded text file (.txt)
If client has not provided tagging word fle then it is much beneftial for us to follow the procedure of Coding. This is not only
save the time but also save out cost.
Remember:
1. In InDesign coding is case-sesative. If we give wrong tag naming then InDesign use “No Style”. Although This is beneftial that
InDesign does not create new style automatically.
2. When you completed your coding in word fle. Save that fle into text fle and paste these two lines on the top of text fle. If
you are working in InDesign CS 2 means version 4 then:
<ASCII-MAC>
<vsn:4>
If you are working in InDesign CS means version 3 then:
<ASCII-MAC>
<vsn:3>
4S  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
Coding for Paragraph style
<pstyle:TX> There is no need to close paragraph style. Up to next style it will cover all text as TX.
Coding for Character style
<cstyle:bold> For Starting Character Style
<cstyle:> For Closing Character Style
<cstyle:bold>^&<cstyle:> you will have to closeup the character style by using <cstyle:> otherwise character style will used
up to last of fle.
Coding for formatting and special Character
See the below chart for Formating the text and Special Characters
Character Formatting Codes Special Character Codes
Bold <ct:Bold>^&<ct:> < and > {lt} and {gt}
Italic <ct:Italic>^&<ct:> En space <0x2002>
Superscript <cp:Superscript>^&<cp:> Em space <0x2003>
Subscript <cp:Subscript>^&<cp:> En dash <0x2013>
Underline <cu:1> ^&<cu:> Em dash <0x2014>
All caps <ccase:All Caps>^& <ccase:> After placing fle into InDesign, convert
{lt}, {gt} into proper symbol by using
fnd replace command.
Small caps <ccase:Small Caps>^& <ccase:>
Remember:
For formating, we don’t use above mentioned coding. We create seprate character style for each formating and do the character
style coding in word fle. Generally we use “standard InDesign macro” for formating text and special character code.
Coding for Indesign Cs2 footnotes
Yettocreate....
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  49
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
50  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
7
7
XmL in InDesign Cs2
Overview
7.1  XML Structure
7.1  Import XML tags
7.2  Apply XML tags
7.3  Mapping tags and styles
7.4  Use the Structure pane
7.5  Import XML
7.6  Export XML
7.7  Troubleshooting
Overview
Fist of all remember that to use the XML features of InDesign CS2, you do not need extensive XML knowledge.
,¤¤ ·÷¬ +ì ÷~ InDesing ~ XML + work procedure +; ¤~, ÷~ XML +ì basic minimum ·;++;-ì ÷;+ì ¬;í÷·) ,¤¤ ÷~ ·+ 
+;~ +; ¤~,+ ~ +;+ì ~<< í~¬·ì)
So frst of all we will learn the entire XML Structure.
XmL structure
<?xml version=”1.0” encoding=”UTF-8”?>
<!DOCTYPE book SYSTEM “docdtd.dtd”>
<?xml-stylesheet type=”text/xsl” href=”food.xsl”?>
<!ENTITY ext1 SYSTEM “isoamsn.ent”>
<book>
<chapter>
<title id=”chapter5”>5</title>
<subtitle>Food</subtitle>
<para>We need food to stay healthy and grow strong. We eat
different kinds of food. They contain useful substances called nutrients.
Carbohydrates, fats, proteins, vitamins and minerals are the main nutrients
present in our food.</para>
<para>Food is divided into three categories: energy- giving, body-
building and protective.</para>
<sect1>
<title>Energy-giving foods.</title>
<entry align=”left” valign=”top”>
<para>They give us heat and energy to work and play. They
also keep our skin and hair healthy. <emphasis role=”bold”>
Carbohydrates</emphasis> and are energy- giving nutrients.
x &#8808; 1200</para></entry>
<fgure>
<graphic fleref=”images/junk food.jpg” format=”JPG”
align=”center”/>
</fgure>
</sect1>
</chapter>
</book>
Root
Element
Child
Element
XmL Document
A data object that is well-formed, according to the XML recommendation, and that might (or might not) be valid. The XML doc-
ument has a logical structure (composed of declarations, elements, comments, character references, and processing instruc-
tions) and a physical structure (composed of entities, starting with the root, or document entity).
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  53
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
XmL Version Declarations 
+; + ¤; version use í+«; ·; -÷; ÷ ) í·¤¤  «÷ ·(; ¬¬(; ÷  í+ ~ + document XML coded í+«; ÷ ; ÷
It is the information for the application. XML documents start with an XML version declaration (XML declaration) which speci-
fes the version of XML being used.
It is suggested by the W3C specifcation. The XML declaration is a processing instruction that notifes the processing
agent that the following document has been marked up as an XML document. It will look something like the following:
<?xmlversion=”1.0”?>
The version declaration can also contain other information such as an encoding declaration or standalone declarations.
encoding Declarations
Encoding Declarations inform the processor what kind of code the document uses (e.g. UFT8, which is the same character Set
as ASCII). All XML parsers must support 8-bit and 16-bit Unicode encoding corresponding to ASCII. However, XML parsers
may support a larger set. For a list of encoding types go to the XML Specifcation.
<?xmlversion=”1.0”?encoding=”UTF-8”?>
dtd (Document type Defnition)
,¤~  fle ~  use ÷; +  +;¬  ¤;-  tags well formed and systematically defne í+«  ÷; (  ÷ ) ·- XML fle ~  +; ,  · ¤; tag use í+«; ·;(; ÷  ·; 
dtd ~  defne +÷ì  ÷  (;  XML verify/parse +÷ì  ÷;  ·;(ì ÷ )
dtd in XML is a grammar that describes what tags and attributes are valid in an XML document that refers to the DTD, and in
what context the tags and attributes are valid.
In other words it is the markup declarations that describe a grammar for a class of documents. The DTD is declared
within the document type declaration production of the XML fle. The markup declarations can be in an external subset (a
special kind of external entity), in an internal subset directly within the XML fle, or both. The DTD for a document consists
of both subsets taken together.
XmL dtd Declaration
dtd fle +; +;~ í¬·;; ·;(; ÷  «;í+ ¤ fle +;  call í+«; ·;(; ÷ )
<!DOCTYPEbookSYSTEM“docdtd.dtd”>
XsL (extensible stylesheet Language)
í·¤ ·+;- ÷~ +;, style sheet (+;( ÷ ;- according to the job ¤+ì confgration set +-( ÷ ¤ì (-÷ XSL XML coding document +; 
style set +-(ì ÷) «;í+ <¤- ’;<; ~ XSL XML +ì style sheet ÷) “XSL is a way of applying transformations and formatting
to XML documents.”
54  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
XsL Declaration
XML coding document ~  top ~  ;+  +;¬ì «  line ¤ XML document +  í¬· XSL fle +;  call/read +-(ì ÷ ) 
food.xsl
<?xmlversion=”1.0”encoding=”UTF-8”?>
<xsl:stylesheet version=”1.0” xmlns:xsl=”http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform” xmlns:
fo=”http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Format”>
<xsl:templatematch=”/”>
<xsl:apply-templates/>
</xsl:template>
<xsl:templatematch=”*”>
<xsl:apply-templates/>
</xsl:template>
<html>
<bodystyle=”margin:3%17%3%17%;font:normal1emMyriadRoman;”>
<xsl:apply-templates/></body>
</html>
</xsl:template>
<xsl:templatematch=”book/chapter/title”>
XmL entity
The function of an XML entity is similar to that of a macro defnition.
Entity in XML is a virtual storage unit. It is often a separate fle, but may be a string or even a database record. In XML,
an entity declaration provides the ability to have constants or replacement strings, which are expanded by a pre-processor.
An entity declaration maps some token to a replacement string. Later the token can be prefxed with the & character and
the replacement string is put in its place.
There are three things that might loosely be called entities in XML:
1. Internal entities function as typing shortcuts or macros.
2. External entities allow you to incorporate content from other fles.
3. Parameter entities, which can be internal or external, are only available within the internal and external subsets (the
DTD).
An XML parser reading this document will look for an external entity e.g.named “isoamsn.ent” and report an error if it doesn’t
fnd it. If it does fnd a fle named that looks like this,
CodeforEntity Explanation
isoamsn.ent
<!ENTITYgne “&#8809;”> <!--U02269 /gneq N: greater, not equals -->
<!ENTITYgnE “&#8809;”> <!--U02269 /gneqq N: greater, not dbl equals -->
<!ENTITYgnsim “&#8935;”> <!--U022E7 /gnsim N: greater, not similar -->
<!ENTITYlnap “&#10889;”> <!--U02A89 /lnapprox N: less, not approximate -->
<!ENTITYlne “&#8808;”> <!--U02268 /lneq N: less, not equals -->
<!ENTITYlnE “&#8808;”> <!--U02268 /lneqq N: less, not double equals -->
<!ENTITYlnsim “&#8934;”> <!--U022E6 /lnsim N: less, not similar -->
<!ENTITYnap “&#8777;”> <!--U02249 /napprox N: not approximate -->
<!ENTITYncong “&#8775;”> <!--U02247 /ncong N: not congruent with -->
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  55
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
Root element
Every XML document has one element that contains all other elements of the document. The root element is also called the
document element.
tags
Tags are text structures that mark the beginning and end of elements within the XML document. Tags are markup
characters.
Child element
Child element is an element contained within another element. The element containing other elements is known as the parent
element.
<sect1>
<title>Energy-giving foods.</title>
<entry align=”left” valign=”top”>
<para>They give us heat and energy to work and play. They also keep our skin and hair healthy. <emphasis
role=”bold”>Carbohydrates</emphasis> and are energy- giving nutrients. x &#8808; 1200</para>
</entry>
<;÷-·; + í¬· ,¤ coding ~ ·÷; <sec1> parent element ÷ ¤+; child element <title>, <entry> ÷) ·-·( +«;í+ <para> ·; í+ 
<entry> + ·<- ; -÷; ÷ ,¤í¬· <para> <entry> +; child element +÷¬;«·; ;- <entry> parent element.
Thus we see that any code can be child element or parent element both. If it containing other tag then those tags will be treated it’s child
element.
Attribute
An attribute is a property of an element. It is an additional information about a piece of data (element). Often attributes are
used to pass information about the element and hence can be said to provide metadata for the element.
An attributes is a value indicator (=) and the attribute value is specifed within the tag (i.e. <H3 align=”center”>). At-
tribute in XML is a name=”value” pair that can be placed in the start tag of an element. For XML, all values must be quoted
with single or double quotes.
Content
Content is all data between the start tag and end tag of an element. Content may be made up of markup characters and char-
acter data.
Unicode
is a standard for representing characters from languages around the world. Generally Entity fle contains unicode characters.
Valid
An XML document is valid if it conforms to the vocabulary specifed in a DTD or schema. In other words, an XML document
with an associated document type declaration that follows all the rules of that declaration is valid.
Well formed
A well-formed XML document follows all the rules of the XML specifcation. But it is not necessarily valid according to an asso-
ciated document type declaration. A well-formed XML document does not necessarily include a DTD.
56  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
;kfu vc rd ge le>s fd%
XML Coding +; best input text source fle ~;+; ·;(; ÷ +«;í+ XML coded data different platform «; different packages/
software ~ (;-(;- change +÷ì ÷;(; ÷) +«;í+ «÷ ·-ì (-÷ ¤ text base ÷;(; ÷ +;, ~;ì character ,¤~ manually set +÷ì í+«; 
·;(;) ;- +;, ~;ì client (;- (;- ·+ ÷ì source data +; :ì+ +÷ì +-+; ¬;÷(;) +÷ ¤ì data +; multi-purpose use +-+; ¬;÷(; ÷)
1. XML File ~  data +ì coding/tagging +ì ·;(ì ÷ ) ·;  <...> ¤  start ; - </...> ¤  close ÷; (ì ÷ ) · ¤ .
  <para>Food is divided into three categories: energy- giving, body-building and protective.</para>
a. XML ~  ·;  tagging +ì ·;(ì ÷ , +÷ tagging DTD fle ~  well formed and serial wise defne ÷; (ì ÷ ) ·«;+ -·;+; ¬;í÷· í+ 
XML ~  ·÷ì  tagging +;  use +-+; ¬;í÷· ·;  DTD File ~  defne +- -·;  ÷; ) +-+; +÷ XML File Varify/Parse +÷ì ÷; ·;(ì 
÷) ·;;( ¤~ error -÷ ·;(ì ÷)
b.  Simple Formatting e.g.: bold, italic, ctr, left, and Callout... + í¬· Attributes +ì coding +-+ì ÷;(ì ÷) ·¤. 
  <emphasis role=”bold”>...</emphasis>: for bold
<graphic fleref=”images/junk food.jpg” format=”JPG” align=”center”/> ... </graphic> : for calling graph
«÷;  «  (;( ·«;+ < +  +;¬ì ÷  í+ close + +¬ main tag +;  ÷ì í+«; ·;(; ÷ ) +~;ì ~;ì Attributes + ; close +÷ì  í+«; ·;(;
2. DTD File ¤ ¤ XML coded fle +; well formed checked í+«; ·;(; ÷) dtd fle ~ ÷ì ¤;-ì tagging defne +ì ·, ÷;(ì ÷)
3. XSL File + ·í-« ¤+ì designing/fromating +ì ·;(ì ÷) «;í+ styling +ì ·;(ì ÷)
4. Entity + ·í-« ¤;- special character +ì coding +ì ·;(ì ÷) « Internal Entity «; External Entity (Seprated File) <;+; 
÷ì -· ~ ÷; ¤+( ÷)
( ÷~;- ·;¤ ·; material ÷ 
from XmL Person from setup Person
XML Coded File DTD File XSL File Entity File Fonts Templete Sample File
«;í+ +¬ í~¬;+- í·(+; Material ·--ì ·;; +; ¤;-; ÷~;- ·;¤ ; ¬+; ÷ ;- ÷~ ¤+ (;- at least basic ·;++;-ì (; ¬ ÷ì ¬+ ÷ í·(+ì ·--ì ·;ì (; 
( ÷~ ( ÷~ ¤~,· í+ InDesign CS2 í+¤ ·+;- XML +; support +-(; ÷)
Getting started XmL with InDesign Cs2
~;+ ¬ìí·· ;· ¤;·;;-·; (-ì+ ¤ coding +-( ÷ (; ;· +«; +-( ÷;· ;·+; ·(;( ÷;·; paragraph style, character style, formating
style, special character fonts... etc. +ì coding +-( ÷ í+- ¤ fle +; InDesign ~ place +- ¬( ÷) ·- +;, style coding ~ ·¬( 
¬· ·«; ÷ (; ¤ InDesing ~ :ì+ ¬·; ¬·)
í(·+¬ ¤÷ì) «÷ì coding +; process ~;ì ÷;(; ÷ ·÷; coding person according to the templete styling  +-+ <(; ÷ ;- ·( ÷~ coded
fle +; templete ~ place í+«; ·;(; ÷ (; ·+ ;· ÷ì ¤;- style ¬· ·;( ÷ ÷~ í¤+ setting +-+ì ÷;(ì ÷ ·¤ fotting element like
tables and fgure ¤÷ì (-ì+ ¤ set +-+ì ÷;(ì ÷)
«÷; « (;( «;+ <+ì +;¬ì ÷ í+ normal coding person word fle ~ +÷ì styles +ì coding +-(; ÷ ·; ¤ <ì ·;(ì ÷) «;í+ job to job
style naming change ÷;(ì ÷)
( ÷~ ·;;:; ¤; process change +-( ÷ ;- « +÷( ÷ í+ ·+ coding person ;·+; ;·+ì templete + í÷¤;( ¤ +÷ì (í·+ ·+ Fix
International Standard + í÷¤;( ¤ coding +-+ <(; ÷) ¤ +÷ì ·(; ;·+ ·+ì templete ~ +;++;+ ¤ style (+;« ÷ ¤+ (; (¤ 
Standardisation XML Coding +ì ;- File ;·+; ·+:; <(; ÷)
«;í+ ( ;·+ ·;¤ XML Coded File ; ¬+ì ÷) Now you will have to import the text into your XML fle. ·- «÷; « (;( ·«;+ <+ 
+;¬ì ÷;(ì ÷ í+ ;· ,¤ XML Coded File +; í+¤ ·+;- ¤ ·+ì InDesign Templete ~ Place +-;«·)
step 1:  Open the templete after opening the fonts
·( ;· templete open +-+ structure pane open +-( ÷; (; +÷; default “Root” element display ÷; -÷; ÷;(; ÷) ( ;·+; í+·+í¬í·;( 
step ¬+ ÷;·)
step 2:  “Load DTD...”
·¤ ÷ì ;· job related dtd import +-;· “Root” + ·- dtd display ÷; ·;··ì)
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  57
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
step 3:  “Import XML...” Coded File
XML Coded File import +-( ÷ì structure pane ~ XML style sheet top ·- add ÷; ·;··ì ;- Root + ·<- ¤;- element display 
÷; ·;··)
step 4:  Import the XML File into the layout
Importing XmL file
·÷¬ì (;( (; « í+ XML Coded File ¤;·;;-·; Coded File +ì ~;;(ì (File →
Place) get +÷ì +-;, ·;(ì) ,¤ <; (-ì+; ¤ Place í+«; ·; ¤+(; ÷)
1. File → Import XML: Simply Import the XML File
2. View → Structure → Show Structure: Then side ~ ·; Structure Pannel 
;«; ÷ ¤+ Right side ~ ·; symbol ( ) í<·; -÷; ÷ ¤ ·- click +ìí·· ;·+; 
“Import XML... +; option í<·;;, <·;;) ¤¤ Coded fle +; import í+«; ·; 
¤+(; ÷)
Now you can either manually layout XML content, or automate its layout by
importing it into a document that contains placeholder frames.
When you import an XML fle, InDesign initially places it into the
Structure Pane. If you’ve created placeholder frames (beofre importing
the XML Coded File), InDesign can also import the content into the frames
for you.
manual Layout
The most common method for importing XML into InDesign is to drag the
unplaced content from the Structure pane into frames in your document.
This approach works well if you don’t know the precise sequence of ele-
ments in the imported XML fle, if the type of content varies, or if you get
content from multiple sources.
Automatic Layout
If you know the order of the elements in the XML fle you plan to import, you can create placeholder frames for the XML con-
tent. When you import the XML fle, InDesign merges the content into the placeholder frames automatically
n
·¤; í+ ;·+; ·÷¬ ((;«; ·«; ·;; í+ XML Coding person ;·+; ;·+ì templete + í÷¤;( ¤ +÷ì (í·+ ·+ Fix International
Standard + í÷¤;( ¤ coding +-+ <(; ÷) ¤ +÷ì ·(; ;·+ ·+ì templete ~ +;++;+ ¤ style (+;« ÷ ¤+ (; (¤ Standardisation
XML Coding +ì ;- File ;·+; ·+:; <(; ÷) ( ;· fle +; place +- ¬+ ÷; ¬í++ ( ;·+; ·(; ¬¬(; ÷ í+ (÷( ¤ tag name 
;·+ì templete ~ (+;« ·« style ¤ match +÷ì +-() 
;·+ ·;¤ ( <; (-ì+ ÷ í+ «; (; ;· ÷- paragraph ·- ·+·+ +-+ mannually ¤÷ì style ¬·;« «; mapping +- ¬) ( ¤+;¬ 
:(; ÷ « mapping ÷;(ì +«; ÷)
XML in InDesign Structure Pane XML Placed in Layout
Figure 8.1 Manual Importing the XML Coded File.
XML in InDesign Structure Pane XML Placed in Layout
Figure 8.1 Manual Importing the XML Coded File.
5S  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
What is mapping
“Mapping is a process in which you can replace the coded fle’s tag into InDesing style”.
See the below image: (Window → Tag → Map Tag to Styles)
,¤ image ~  left side ~  “Tag” ; - right side  ~  “Style” +ì list <  -·;ì ÷ ) «÷;  Tag
~  XML coding person +  word fle ~  ·;  tag use í+«  ÷  ++ì list ÷  ; - Style ~  ·; 
setup person +  style (+;«  ÷  ++ì list ÷ ) ( ;·+;  +-+; «  ÷  í+ ;· ·«;+· + + Tag
vs Style +;  :ì+ ¤  map +-; ¬ ) ,¤ (-÷ mapping +ì ~<< ¤  ;· ·+ (;- ~  ÷ì ¤;-ì 
styling ·+ì ·--( +  + ¤;- change +- ¤+(  ÷ ) ; - next fle +  í¬· ~;ì ,¤ì mapping
setting +;  save +-+  -·; ¤+(  ÷ )
Mapping +-+  +  í¬· ;·+;  ·+ì XML Coded File ·+  Indesign Sample +;  study 
+-+; ÷; ·; ¤ì +ì ~<< ¤  ;· «÷ ·;+ ·;; ·  í+ coding person +  ÷- + element  +  í¬· 
+; ++; + ¤; tag use í+«; ÷ ) (~;ì ;· ¤  ·+ì templete +  í÷¤;( ¤  map +-; ·;; · ) 
¤;~;·«(. Mapping XML fle +;  templete +  ·<- drag +-+  ¤  ·÷¬  ÷ì +-+ì ¬;í÷·)
Paragraph and Character style Attributes
· ¤; í+ ;·+;  ~;ì (+ ·(; ¬·; í+ ;· paragraph styles +;  mapping +  ,;-; match +-; ¤+(  ÷ ) ·-·(  ;· typefaces and typestyles 
+;  + ¤  map +-;« · · XML Coding ~  ÷- + typefaces í+- ¬;÷  +;  bold, italic, superscript «; +; ,  ; - type +ì ÷;  ¤(+  í¬· ·+ ÷ì (-ì+  ¤ 
coding +ì ·;(ì ÷ ) · ¤ . <emphasis role=”bold”> ... </emphasis> «; <emphasis role=”italic”> ... </emphasis>
( ·( ;· ·+ì Indesign File ~  XML File Import +-+  mapping +-+  ¬·(  ÷;  (;  ;·+;  ÷- typeface/typestyle +  í¬· í¤+  ·+ ÷ì 
tag “emphasis” í~¬(; ÷ ) ( ;· +«; +-; · · 
,¤+  í¬· XML File ~  ;·+;  additional character style coding +-+ì ÷; (ì ÷ ) +;  + ¤ .
For text formatting, you use the aid:pstyle and aid:cstyle attributes to specify paragraph and character styles, respectively. The
following example shows these attributes:
Recieved XML Coded File Alteration in XML Coded File
<?xml version=”1.0” encoding=”UTF-8” ?>
<!DOCTYPE Recipe SYSTEM “food.dtd”>
<root>
<para>They give us heat and energy to work and play. They also keep our skin
and hair healthy. <emphasis role=”bold”>Carbohydrates</emphasis> and are
energy- giving nutrients. x &#8808; 1200</para></entry>
</root>
<?xml version=”1.0” encoding=”UTF-8” ?>
<!DOCTYPE Recipe SYSTEM “food.dtd”>
<root xmlns:aid=”http://ns.adobe.com/AdobeInDesign/4.0/”>
<para aid:pstyle=”tx”>They give us heat and energy to work and play. They also
keep our skin and hair healthy. <emphasis aid:cstyle=”bold”>Carbohydrates</
emphasis> and are energy- giving nutrients. x &#8808; 1200</para></entry>
</root>
tables Attributes
,¤ì · +;- Tables +  í¬· ~;ì XML File ~  ;·+;  additional table style coding +-+ì ÷; (ì ÷ ) (;í+ ·( ;· xml fle layout ~  drag +-  ;·+;  (+ì (+;, 
table í~¬ ¤+ )
Attribute Value Description
table table
cell
Specifies a table-type element. A value of “table” indicates the container tABLe element;
A value of “cell” indicates a cell element.
trows Numeric Specifies the number of RoWs in the table. Used only in the Table element.
tcols Numeric Specifies the number of CoLUmns in the table. Used only in the Table element.
theader Empty If present, the theader attribute indicates that the current cell is part of a tABLe HeADeR row.
crows Numeric Specifies how many RoWs the CURRent CeLL sPAns. The default is 1.
ccols Numeric Specifies how many CoLUmns the CURRent CeLL sPAns. The default is 1.
ccolwidth Numeric Specifies the WIDtH, in points, of the CURRent CeLL.
tfooter Empty If present, the tfooter attribute indicates that the current cell is part of a tABLe footeR row.
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  59
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
Here is an example of table.
table Header 1 table Header 2 table Header 3 table Header 4
A B C D
E straddles two columns F G
H I
J straddles two rows
K
L M N
Table footer
The XML code for the table is shown below:
<Table xmlns:aid=”http://ns.adobe.com/AdobeInDesign/4.0/” aid:table=”table” aid:trows=”6” aid:tcols=”4”>
<Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:theader=”” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1”>Table header 1</Cell>
<Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:theader=”” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1”>Table header 2</Cell>
<Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:theader=”” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”130”>Table header 3</Cell>
<Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:theader=”” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”130”>Table header 4</Cell>
<Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid: ccolwidth=”130”>A</Cell>
<Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”59”>B</Cell>
<Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”130”>C</Cell>
<Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”130”>D</Cell>
<Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”2”>E straddles two columns</Cell>
<Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”130”>F</Cell>
<Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”130”>G</Cell>
<Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”130”>H</Cell>
<Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”59”>I</Cell>
<Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”2” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”130”>J straddles two rows</Cell>
<Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”130”>K</Cell>
<Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”130”>L</Cell>
<Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”59”>M</Cell>
<Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”130”>N</Cell>
<Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:tfooter=”” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”130”>Table footer</Cell>
</Table>
Understand/Learn the other terms of InDesign XmL
InDesign lets you import and layout XML content, as well as export documents to XML. Because
the hierarchy and order of elements is so important in XML fles, you will use the Structure pane
and Tags palette frequently when working with XML content. The Structure pane displays all the
elements within the document and their hierarchy. To help you identify the elements, InDesign
displays the element tag and icons that represent dierent types of content, such as text or graph-
ics. In addition, it can display the frst words of any text within an element, called a text snippet.
The Structure Pane lets you view, edit, and manage your XML elements. You use the Structure
pane in many ways when working with XML. For example:
1. to place imported XML content into the layout, you can drag elements from the Structure
pane directly to a page.
2. When you apply tags to content, you use the Structure pane to adjust the hierarchy of the
elements.
3. You can add elements, attributes, comments, and processing instructions.
The aid:trows and aid:tcols
attributes specify the number of
rows and columns in the table.
The empty aid:theader attribute
indicates a heading cell. Footing
cells use a similar aid:tfooter
attribute. Regular table cells do
not have an attribute to indicate
what type they are.
The aid:ccols attribute indicates
that the current cell spans the
specified number of columns. The
default, 1, indicates no column
spanning. The aid:crows attribute
indicates row spanning.
The aid:trows and aid:tcols
attributes specify the number of
rows and columns in the table.
The empty aid:theader attribute
indicates a heading cell. Footing
cells use a similar aid:tfooter
attribute. Regular table cells do
not have an attribute to indicate
what type they are.
The aid:ccols attribute indicates
that the current cell spans the
specified number of columns. The
default, 1, indicates no column
spanning. The aid:crows attribute
indicates row spanning.
A B C D
A. Triangles to expand or
collapse elements
B. Element (placed in layout)
C. Element (not placed in layout)
D. Text snippet
A B C D
A. Triangles to expand or
collapse elements
B. Element (placed in layout)
C. Element (not placed in layout)
D. Text snippet
60  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
The Tags Palette lists tags for each element in a document. You can import, export, add, delete, and rename tags. You use the
Tags palette to apply element tags to content that you plan to export to XML. You can also use it to tag frames before importing
XML into them.
Understand the structuring Pane
The Structure pane displays a hierarchical tree of tagged page items and imported XML content. Items that appear in the
Structure pane are called elements. At a glance, the Structure pane shows which elements have been placed on the page and
which have not (a blue diamond on an element icon indicates that the element is attached to a page item). You select and move
elements in the Structure pane to defne the sequence and hierarchy of page items in the exported XML fle.
Structure Pane Icons with It’s Name and Functions
When a tagged page item is selected in the document layout, the corresponding item is underlined in the Structure pane. The
following icons appear in the Structure pane:
Icon name Use
structural element Each document includes only one root element, which can be renamed, but cannotbe
moved or delet ed.Other structural elements are used to organize the elements listed
below.
story element Represents tagged stories (one or more linked frames).
text element Represents XML-tagged text within aframe.
Graphic element Represents a tagged frame that includes a placed image. Each graphic element includes
an “href ” attribute that defines the path or URL to the linked file.
Unplaced text element Unplaced text element not yet associatedwitha page item in the document layout.
Unplaced Graphic element Unplaced graphic element not yet associated with a page item in the document
layout.
table element Represents a table.
Header Cell element Represents a cell in the header row of a table.
Body Cell element Represents a cell within the body of a table.
footer Cell element Represents a cell in the footer row of a table.
empty element An empty frame is associated with this element.
Attribute Includesmetadata, such as keywords or location of a linked image (HREF attribute).
Attributes are meaningful in XML but do not appear in the InDesign document itself.
Comment Includes comments that appear in the XML file, but not the InDesign document.
Processing Instruction Includes an instruction that triggers anaction in applications that can read processing
instructions.
Doctype element Tells InDesign which DTD file to use when validating the XML file.
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  6!
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
To Use The Structure Pane
• To view the Structure pane, choose View → Structure → Show Structure.
• To expand or collapse an element, click the triangle next to the element you want to expand or collapse.
• To expand or contract an element as well as all elements contained within it, hold down Command Key while clicking the
triangle next to the element.
• To show or hide text snippets, choose Show Text Snippets or Hide Text Snippets from the Structure pane menu. Showing or
hiding text snippets sets the default for any new document you create.
• To resize the Structure pane, drag the splitter button (at the bottom of the document window) left or right.
• To open the Structure pane to the last saved width, or to close the Structure pane if it’s open, click the splitter button at the
bottom of the document window.
To Rearrange Elements
You can rearrange the order of elements in the Structure pane. The root element must remain at the top of the structure.
Only the DTD(appearing as aDOCTYPE element), comments, or processing instructions can appear above the root element.
You cannot move or delete the root element or the DOCTYPE element. In addition, you cannot drag table cell elements or drop
elements into a table element.
Changing the hierarchy affects the structure of exported XML fles. If you move a text element to make it the child of an
element elsewhere in the structure, the text in the layout also moves.
IntheStructurepane,youcandothefollowing:
• To move an element, drag it to a new location within the structure tree. A line appears when you drag to indicate where
you are inserting the element. The width of the line marks the level within the hierarchy.
• To make an element a child of another element, either position it over the parent element to highlight it or place it amongst
the parent’s other child elements, and then release the mouse button.
• To move an element out a level in the hierarchy, drag it just above another parent element and move to the left slightly
until the line indicating its
placement spans the width
of the parent element.
• To copy or cut an element,
select the element or
elements in the Structure
pane, and then choose
Edit → Copy or Edit → Cut.
Select the element directly
above where you want to
insert the element, and
choose Edit→Paste.
Note: When you cut an element,
the element and contents are
cut to the clipboard, but the
frame remains intact.
Viewing XmL tags
To help you manage XML tags
in an InDesign fle, you can set
up the fle to show tags. In the
main document window, tags
appear as colored brackets. In
the Story Editor, the entire tag
name appears. To display XML
tags, choose View → Structure
→ShowTagMarkers.
62  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
to show or Hide tagged frames or tag markers
You can display tagged frames in color or display colored brackets around
tagged text. The tag color determines the color of the frame or bracket.
• To display tagged frames in color, choose
View→Structure→ShowTaggedFrames.
• To hide the color-coding of tagged frames, choose
View→Structure→HideTaggedFrames.
• To display color brackets around tagged text, choose
View→Structure→ ShowTagMarkers.
• To hide color brackets around tagged text, choose
View→Structure→HideTagMarkers.
To minimize the risk of accidentally deleting a tag marker, edit tagged text
in Story Editor, where tag markers are more visible.
Note: If you choose Type→ShowHiddenCharacters, markers for returns, index entries, and hyperlinks will appear.
to Validate XmL structure
When you validate the XML in a document, InDesign compares the struc-
ture, element tag names, and attributes against the DTD you loaded. InDesign
alerts you if the XML deviates from the DTD, and suggest the ways to fx
the XML to match the DTD requirements. You can fx errors one at a time
or view all errors at once in a separate window.
A. Loaded DTD
B. Error or invalidating condition
C. Description of error with suggested fx
D. Error count
E. Validate button
F. View all errors at once in a separate window
Elements appear in the Structure pane (left);
markers surround tagged text (right).
A
B
C
D E F
8
8
YoRk’s X-tABLe
Overview
About Table
8.1  X-Table’s Seven Styles of Tables
8.2  Advance Feature
8.3  Tips on Technique
Overview
YORK’s XTable is a professional table composition enhancement available for QuarkXPress. Since XTable is a QuarkXTension,
you can take advantage of all the functionality available in QuarkXPress when you use it to set type that is destined to be made
into a table. When you are ready to build a table, you will use standard dialogs and menus to specify the table’s parameters.
XTable will fgure tab stops, indentions and so on to compose the table to your specifcations..
WhatCanIDowithXTable?
XTable contains a wealth of practical features that enable you to:
• Control column and gutter widths.
• Set straddle heads and control how they are positioned over the columns they straddle.
• Automatically align horizontal paragraph rules with type.
• Specify text alignment in columns, and align type on special points within each of the columns.
• Change the positioning in the column of any data in the table—operations are allowed on any “cell,” line, or column.
WhatIsaTable?
A table is a collection of information logically organized in rows and columns usually according to content. Using composition
software, you can make this information more attractive, readable, and understandable.
YORK’s XTable allows you to format your information in any one of seven basic styles. There are variations on most of
these styles that give you complete control over your table’s appearance.
Elementsof Tables
• Rows Horizontal arrangements of characters in straight lines. We will generally use the terms row and line
interchangeably.
• Column Area containing type that runs vertically on the page. Columns are separated from one another by white space or
by white space and vertical rules.
• Gutter This term is usually used to refer to the white space between two facing pages in a book. In table composition,
however, we use the word gutter to mean the white space between two adjacent columns.
• Inside Gutter Any gutter that falls after the frst column and before the last column.
• Outside Gutter There are exactly two per table—the one that falls before the frst column and the one that comes after the
last column.
• Head Word or words at the top of the column which categorize the data in the column.
• Straddle Head A head that is placed over more than one of the columns in the table, separate from the table title or main
head.
• Straddle Rule A rule that spans more than one column in the table. They usually run from the lefthand edge of one
column to the right-hand edge of another.
• Quadding The procedure of “setting white space” to fll out the end of a typeset line. Quadding space is placed on either
side of a centered line, the right-hand end of a fush left line, or the left-hand end of a fush right line. The term evolved
from quadrat which referred to a piece of lead one en or more in width. An en space is a space with a width equal to one-
half the current point size. In 10 point type, it would be a space fve points wide; in 12 point type, a space six points wide,
and so on.
• Text Line A patch of type set inside the table body which is neither in any one column nor a straddle head.
• Alignment Point A character in a column which, if present in the column when XTable typesets the table, will be in the
same position with respect to the left-hand edge of the column for all lines in that column.
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  65
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
Xtable’s seven styles of tables
At YORK, we have found that practically any table will fall into one of seven distinct classes. We have incorporated these classes
into the way XTable works and called them styles (not style sheets) in order to automate the process of specifying the format
for tables. This should speed your work and make using the program more convenient.
style A
This is the style most commonly used to set tables that
will have vertical rules. That is because after determin-
ing the column and gutter widths, XTable puts a space
equal to one-half the inside gutter width in front of
the frst column and after the last column. When you
subsequently draw vertical rules that are fush left and
right on the measure, the white space around those
rules will be equal to the white space around the rules
in the table’s inside gutters.
«;í+ í·+ tables ~ vertical rule :;¬+; ÷;(; ÷ +÷; ÷~ Xtable + Style A +; use +-( ÷) +«;í+ ,¤¤ +; ++¬ +;¬~ + (ì¬ +; -·¤ 
equal ÷;(; ÷ (í·+ ·÷¬ ;- ;í·;-ì +;¬~ + text + <;+; (-+ equal space ÷;+ ¤ + ~;ì (;+ì +;¬~ +ì (-÷; ÷ì set ÷;(; ÷)
style B
This is the style you will probably use most, since it
affords you the greatest fexibility and control over
composition issues such as gutter and column widths.
Style B table is typeset to fll the measure. The type
in the frst column will be fush left and the widest
item in the last column will be fush right, with the
rest of the type aligning on that widest item.
But Style B offers much more. Using it, you can
specify gutter widths for the outside gutters, for the inside gutters, or both. In fact, Style B is the only style that allows fxed
gutters both inside and outside the body of the table. If you instruct XTable to set a Style B table to a width of 30 picas with
fxed outside gutters of 3 picas, the program will compute the correct gutter size for the gutters inside the table to force the
table to set to 30 picas. Conversely, if you ask XTable for fxed inside gutters each 3 picas wide, the type in the frst column
will come out fush left, and each inside gutter will be 3 picas wide. In this case, there isn’t much for the program to do other
than determine where to set the tab stops so that you will get gutters the specifed width and warn you of an overset error
should one occur. Finally, if you specify amounts for both inside and outside gutters, the effect is the same as setting a Style
B table with fxed inside gutters and a paragraph indent applied to the range of text that makes up the table. There are even
more ways to manipulate a Style B table, such as using XTable’s Add Remainder command, but these advanced features are
thoroughly explained later in this chapter.
style C
You will want to use this style when you
need to center a table in a specifed measure.
Typically, you specify the widths of the inside
gutters, and XTable will compute left and right
paragraph indents and tab stops to center the
entire table and set any paragraph rules fush
left and right on the type. Alternately, you can
ask XTable to set your Style C table with fxed
outside gutters, and the program will compute
the correct width for the inside gutters to set
the table to your specifcation.
Style C tables are frequently used in-line in text columns. Using them this way tends to give greater visual emphasis to
the table.
66  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
styles D and e
The main feature of both these styles is the automatic computation of gutter space. The entire table is set fush on one of the
margins. As XTable determines the inside gutter space, it leaves room for a space equal to one-half that space and puts that
space at the other margin. You cannot specify gutter widths when using these styles.
style f
This style is normally set fush right. In that sense, it
is rather like a Style D table, except you can use fxed
inside gutters. Since this style uses fxed gutters, it
allows you to employ some of XTable’s advanced fea-
tures, such as Add Remainder. In the example that
follows, we show this feature for the frst time. We
instructed the program to set the inside gutters to
18 points. We then used the Add Remainder command to add a maximum of 12 points to the gutter following the frst
column and 12 points to the gutter preceding the last column. This sets off the three columns in the center. Since the table
did not overset when the maximum was added to the gutters we specifed as Add Remainder gutters, XTable puts in the
maximum for each. Our table’s gutter widths are 30–18–18–30 points. Had the table reached its maximum width of 27
picas while the program was spreading the gutters after columns one and four, XTable would have adjusted the amounts
added to the “fexible” gutters.
style G
When you use this style, XTable sets all columns to the
width of the widest one. Gutter widths are computed by the
program; user-specifed gutter widths are not permitted.
The following example helps to make this clear. Note
that the type in the last column is not fush right on the
measure. The reason is that the program padded the frst
and last columns with blank space to make their widths
equal to the width of the widest (the second) column. To
differentiate Style G from similar styles, we set the same
table as a Style B (automatic gutters) table right below
the frst table and invite you to compare the two tables’
appearance.
~;ì (+ ÷~+ X-Table + ¤;(; styles +; ¤~,; í+ ++; í+¤ 
í+¤ condition ~ +÷;+÷; use +-+; ¬;í÷·) ( ÷~ X-table + (;+ì + options +; ¤~,·)
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  67
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
Building a Basic table
When you start QuarkXPress with YORK’s XTable installed correctly, you will see the X-Tables menu item
appear on the main menu bar. In order for any of the items on the Tables menu to be active, you must have
a document open and the Content tool must be selected. For the Initial Typesetting… item to be enabled, you
must have a range of text selected as well.
Now we come to the Ist option Initial Typesetting...
B
F
C
D
A
E
A. TargetWidth: + default -+ - ~--|| ~i current box ·~(| ~i +|i+ i·(+i box +i width ~|(i ~ + .-+ ¤+-|· space adjust +·(|
~i +··( ¤·· ¤|+ ,-- +|, value -+| ¬|~ (| - -+( ~i ·- your text width is 30 pica and you need to set table within 15 pica
maximum. then you need to just give here “15p”. Table will not occupy space more than 15p in any condition.
B. Style: We have already understood the role of style in X-table.
C. Gutter:AutomaticorFixed: ¤·· ¤|+ automatic setlect +·( ~ (| inside and Outside Gutter off ·~( ~i +|i+ i·(+i box +i width
~|(i ~ + .-+ ¤+-|· space +| -|· columns - adjust +· -(| ~i +··( ¤·· Fixed +· click +·( ~ (| + -|+| option on ~| ·|( ~ ¤+ ¤|+
¤++i ·-·( + ¤+-|· gutter fx +· -+( ~i
D. Gutter: Add Reminder: You can specify which gutters are “Add Remainder” and the how much amounts of space to
be added.
E. AddRemainder: Syntax is
Gutter:MaximumAdd,MinimumAdd;
where
Gutterstands for “the gutter following column number,”
MaximumAddis the largest amount of space the program should add to this gutter, and
MinimumAddis the smallest acceptable amount of space to add to this particular gutter. You can specify every gutter
in a table as a fexible gutter.
In the command string, the semicolon separates specifcations for each gutter.
Forexample:Assume you have select a table
Fixed Insie Gutter 5 p12
Add Reminder 5 1:1p,p6;2:0,0;3:1p,p0;
Means gutter between columns will be “in frst gutter after frst column 5 p12 + (1p to p6): +|i+ ¤·· space available ~¤| (|
p24 +~i ~¤| (| +- - +- p12 1 p6 5 p18 ¤|· ¤·· ,(+| space -|i +~i i-¬| (| +~ error message - -·|i” ,-i ++|· --· ¤|· (i-·
gutter +| space -|i adjust ~| ·|+·|i
F. Default Date Positioning: It fx the alignment of columns. You can specify the alignment of column by this option.
Whether you need to set columns left, Right or centre.
HowDoesAddReminderWork?
When XTable fgures the gutters in a table, it begins by setting each gutter to the amount of space specifed for fxed inside
gutters. Next, it adds to those amounts the minimum value specifed for each Add Remainder gutter. If the table has
reached its maximum width or is wider than the specifed measure, XTable stops and displays the table for you. Otherwise,
the program spreads each fexible gutter by the same amount until each one reaches its maximum value or the table
reaches its maximum width, whichever happens frst. This ensures that each gutter’s width is increased equally so that the
overall “balance” of white space is preserved.
6S  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”
set strddle Head
dlfdfdfkj
specify Alignment Point
dlfdfdfkj
Line and Column Quadding
dlfdfdfkj
table Vertical Rules
dlfdfdfkj
troubleshooting
Powermath/XPress math
Overview
9.1 Pi Character Procedure
9.2 Integral Procedure
9.3 Summation Procedure
9.4 Radical Procedure
9.5 Stack Limits
9.6 Macro Slector
9.7 Matrix
9.8 Division/Fractions
9.9 Case Fractions
9.10 Math Rules
9.11 Styles
9.12 Force Level
9.13 Stacking
9
Overview
PowerMath is a Quark XTension used for creating the math equations. ,¤+; ·+ì ·+ Dongle/Hardware key ÷; (ì ÷ ) í·¤ “Eve3
Key” + +;~ ¤ ·;+; ·;(; ÷ ) í(+; ,¤+ powermath demo mode ~ run +-(; ÷ ) Job ~ powermath use +-+; ÷ «; +÷ì « client ((;(;
÷ ·;+; project launch + ¤~« ÷ì (« í+«; ·;(; ÷ )
·- í+¤ì project ~ equations (÷( +~ ÷ (; ++; illustrator ~ (+; ¬+; -·; ÷;(; ÷ +«;í+ powermath ·+ Costly Xtension ÷)
+~;ì ~;ì ·+ì ~·ì ¤ «; ¤í+·;;+¤;- í(+; client permission + powermath use +÷ì +-+; ¬;í÷·)
PowerMath Superset and Version
Each PowerMath project needs its own Superset file, which is a job-specific preferences file. If a job uses PowerMath, the Superset must
be placed in Job Setup folder. The version of PowerMath to use must be listed in the Readme file in the same folder for knowledge of client.
PowerMath supersets cannot be renamed once used to create equations. This means a book may pick up a superset named with a previous
edition’s job code.
PowerMath Supersets should updated by only job lead.
Opening PowerMath Files
A file containing PowerMath equations cannot be opened without first loading the XTension. Any version of PowerMath can be enabled to
allow you to simply open and view, edit text or print a document containing PowerMath, as long as you are not modifying the equations.
Disable PowerMath when Not In Use
The PowerMath XTension stays in your XTension off folder. Only enable it while you are actively using PowerMath in a project. The reason
is: The PowerMath XT cannot be removed from a file once attached (even accidentally), and the XTension will always need to be activated
to open the file. This is a problem if the job was not intended to use PowerMath.
Quark Memory
Increase Quark’s application memory preferred Size to 50,000 to 100,000K while working in PowerMath to speed up the
screen redraw and help prevent crashes. Increase the Minimum Size to well over the 9000 K default.
Demo Mode
If the background of your equation editing window displays yellow on screen, you are in demo mode. You can practice inputting
equations in demo mode, but you will not be able to save your work in PowerMath.
Samples Take Precedence
Every PowerMath job includes a sample of typical math equations for client approval. Once these have been approved, both
desktop and proofreaders must follow the sample style. The math sample is included in the spec package for easy reference. If
a proofreader marks many equations to be modified, or always marks a particular change, stop and investigate before doing
a lot of manual changes that cannot easily be updated. It’s possible the superset should be modified so all the changes are
quickly and consistently implemented.
Keys
⌘=Command
⇪=Shift
⌥=Option
⌅=Control
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  71
Confidential --- “Planman”
1. Copy the job’s superset to your machine. Place it in the
appropriate PowerMath SuperSets folder, located in the
Preferences Folder in your System Folder. (PowerMath
automatically creates these folders.)
2. With the Content Tool, click in a
text box. Pull down the Utilities
menu and select PowerMath
Create Equation, or type ⌘*,
using the asterisk on the
keypad.
3. You will see a message about
missing fonts.
Click OK.
4. The PowerMath equation editing window will open.
But, before starting an equation, you need to load the
job’s Superset. In the upper left corner of this window,
PowerMath tells you which Superset is loaded. At this
point the Superset is Default.
5. Pull down the Supersets
menu, and select Load
Superset, or ⌘⌥L.
6. In the window, highlight the corresponding Superset for
the job and click Select.
Powermath Production techniques
Quark style sheet Determines Base Point size
Before starting a PowerMath
equation, select the appropri-
ate style from the Quark Style
Sheets palette (generally it is
eq, for equation). The base
point size of your equation
will assume the size of whatever style is being used in Quark
at the text insertion point.
Powermath 4 Preferences
In PowerMath 4, the prefer-
ences need to be set up so the
Box Type is AutoCalc. This
means the descenders will
not be cut off in the display in
Quark, so you can now make
screen captures and PDF files
that include PowerMath.
Borders on Powermath Boxes
If your project contains equations within bordered boxes, do
not paste a framed box over the equation in Quark. Frames
should be done within PowerMath so the ruled box flows
along with the type.
This is a two-step process:
1. Build in extra space in the PowerMath anchored box so
the border rule will clear the type. Pull down Style →
Equation Box... Change the Optical Pad Space from 0.0
to the space per specs plus the width of the frame. e.g.,
If the spec says add 6 points around the type and the
frame width is .5 point, enter 6.5 points in the field. Also
make sure Box Type is set to AutoCalc.
2. Apply the frame to the PowerMath anchored box in
Quark. For example:
Getting started with Powermath
72  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Planman”
Pi Character selector (⌘⌥⇪J)
Pi Character dialogue box ¤ ÷~ ·; ¬;÷ character
(+; ¤+( ÷) For example «í< ÷~  +; symbol
¬;í÷· (;.
Step1: Go to powermath menu by ⌘* (command
+ aestrick)
Step2: Now if you have any pre-defined power-
math superset, load that by pressing ⌘⌥L
otherise create new superset by pressing
⌘⌥C.
Step3: Now go in the Pi character Selector
dialogue box by pressing ⇪⌘⌥J.
Step4: ¤(¤ ·÷¬ ;· show palette  ·- click
+- ) · ¤ ÷ì ;· show palette ·- click +- ·
(; ;·+ ¤;~+ colourful pi character chart
display
4 ÷; ·;· ·;;)
Step5: This is called list of complete characters.
«÷; (ì+ color + characters display ÷; -÷
÷ ) (Black, Red and Blue).
• Black Character are already defined for
creating greek characters, special char-
acters like a, b, 2, 3, D, , , 
• Red Character are already defined for
creating, Integral, Radical and summa-
tion like , , 
• Blue Character are unmaped and avail-
able for mapping according to the user.
«;í+ < ¤- ·;<; ~ +÷; ·;· (; default superset
~ black and Red characters +ì configura-
tion already set ÷; (ì ÷ ;·+; í¤+ correct
font select +-+; ÷; (; ÷ ) ++; tag name,
offset, space left, right, scaling etc 2. ¤(
default -· ¤ ·÷¬ ÷ì set ÷; (; ÷ , ·- ;·
¬;÷ (; ¤ ·+ì job + + ¤;- modify +-
¤+( ÷ )
·-·( blue outline character +ì +; , con-
figuration set +÷ì ÷; -·;ì ÷; (ì ÷ ) ·;; ( ¤;-ì
configuration field 2 ~ 0.0 ÷; (; ÷ )
r e me mb e r
In a single time you can see the 256 character and by changing “Key” (⌘1,3,5,7)”, you
can see 256 3 4 5 1024 characters. Means in a single superset you can define 1024
characters.
Step6: ( ÷~ +;·¤ ·+  (+;+ + process ·- +;·¤ ;( ÷ ) ( +«; í+ ÷~  (+;+; ÷ ·; +; (; Greek Character ÷ ; + +; ÷ì
+; , Summation, Integration or Radical. ,¤í¬· ÷~ +; , ~;ì Blue character select +-+; ÷; ·;) · ¤ ÷ì ;· +; , ~;ì Blue
character select +-; · “Tag” Field ~ “pi.⇧1.” · ¤; +; , ~;ì meaningless +;~ ; ·;··;)
Step7: Now “Hide Palette”.

4
3
2 Character
Configurations
Base line
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  73
Confidential --- “Planman”
Step8: Click on “Edit” button. Now you will see that all the configuration option 2 has been activated. Now change the
“Font” Characol into “Symbol” and set all other preferences. ÷~+ symbol font ,¤í¬· select í+«; +«; í+ apple +;
symbol ,¤ font ~ ;(; ÷ ) ( ;· “Show Font” ·- click +-+ required character select +- ¤+( ÷ · ¤ «÷; apple
+; symbol ¬;í÷· (; apple ·- click +- <ìí··) apple ·- click +-( ÷ì “Output Character” ~  ; ·;· ·;;)
Step9: ( ¤;-ì configuration set +- <ìí··)
• Font: According to the character requirement, you will have to select the font. For example if you need to select
“Mathematical Pi 1” for getting 1,2,3,4 or select “MathPiOne italic” for any greek charcter a, b, g or select
"ITC Zapf Dingbats” for ■,●,✓.
• Copyto: ??????
• SetPalettePS:Set Palete Point Size. You can increase the point size of this palette by using this option.
• InputCharacter: Which keyboard character is used for making the required symbol, sign or greek character etc.
i.e. “1” is input character for “1” and font will be “Mathematical Pi 1”.
• OutputCharacter: Combination of Input character and font will be “output charcter”. i.e. 8 with “MathPiOne”
font 5 8. Here 8 (degree) will be output.
• Key: In a single time you can see the 256 character only and by changing “Key” (⌘1,3,5,7)”, you can see 256 3
4 5 1024 characters. Means in a single superset you can define 1024 characters.
• BaselineOffset: This is the same option as we have in quark i.e. “base line shift”. Means ·- ;· character +;
base line + ·- «; +ì¬ set +-+; ¬;÷( ÷ (; ,¤~ negative or positive value : ;¬ì ·; ¤+(ì ÷ ) +«; í+  ÷~ base line
·- ÷ì ¬;í÷· ,¤í¬· «÷; «÷ ”0” ÷ì -÷ ·;)
• SpaceLeft/Right: This is the same option as we have in quark i.e. “kerning”. Means ·- ;· character + left or
right space +; +~ «; ·«;<; +-+; ¬;÷( ÷ (; ,¤~ negative or positive ~ value : ;¬ì ·; ¤+(ì ÷ ) +«; í+  + <; +; (-+
÷~ regular space ÷ì ¬;í÷· ,¤í¬· «÷; «÷ ”0” ÷ì -÷ ·;)
• Horizontal/VerticleScale: This is the same option as we have in quark i.e. “Scale→horizontal/vertical”. Means ·-
;· character size +ì height «; width +; +~ «; ·«;<; +-+; ¬;÷ (; +- ¤+( ÷ ) +«; í+  ÷~ regular size ÷ì ¬;í÷·
,¤í¬· «÷; «÷ scale “100.0/100.0” -÷ ·;) Horizontal and Vertical Scale must be 100% for all pi characters, so
that its must match with text pi characters.
• Superior/InferiorIndexandLevel:These should be ‘0’
Step10: Now give the name in the “Tag Field” 3 i.e. “Apple” click on “Save” then click on “Get”. Now your Pi character has
been created and powermath superset has been updated automatically.
So this was the process to create any new character by using “BlueCharacter fromPi Character Pallete”. By using same proc-
ess you can create any new character. But if you create any character by using “BlackCharacterwhich are already defined for
creating greek characters, special characters like a, b, 2, 3, D, , ,  or RedCharacterwhich are already defined for creating
summation, Integration and Radicaton like , ,  then process is so simple.
· ¤; í+ ·÷¬ ÷ì ((;«; ·«; ÷ í+ ,++ì · -ì configuration ·÷¬ ÷ì set ÷; (ì ÷ ;·+; í¤+ correct font ¬·;;+; ÷; (; ÷ ) <;÷-·; + í¬· ·-
;·+; a (+;+; ÷ (; ;·+; « steps ¬ + ÷; · .
Step1: Go to powermath menu by ⌘* (command + aestrick)
Step2: Now if you have any pre-defined powermath superset, load that by pressing ⌘⌥L otherise create new superset by
pressing ⌘⌥C.
Step3: Now go in the Pi character Selector dialogue box by pressing ⇪⌘⌥J.
Step4: Type “alp”.
Step5: Click on “Edit” button. Now you will see that all the configurations has already corrected by default. You just need
to change the font “characol” into “Mathematical Pi 1”.
Step6: Now click on “Save” then click on “Get”. Your Pi character has created and powermath superset has also updated.
t i p
short Command for getting any character from “Pi character Dialogue box”: “Key” (⌘1,3,5,7) + Input Character
74  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Planman”
auto remap
+ · characters · ¤ ÷; ( ÷ ·; ÷~ ÷~ ·;; í+¤ì spacial font ~ ÷ì ¬;í÷· ÷; ( ÷ · ¤ =, + ÷~ ÷~ ·;; math font ~
÷ì ¬;í÷· ÷; ( ÷ ) · ¤ characters + í¬· ÷~ pi character selector dialogue box ~ ,++; (+;( ¤~« Auto remap
on +- ¬ ( ÷ auto remap +-+ ·- ·( ~;ì ÷~ powermath ~ = «; + type +-( ÷ (; «÷ automatically math
font ~ ÷ì ;(; ÷ ) «;í+ ÷~ (;-(;- Pi character selector dialogue box ~ ·;+ +ì ·--( ÷ì +÷ì ·: (ì)
auto Upsize start/end
According to the situation ÷~ + · characters +; ·; :; «; (: ; ¬ +; ÷; (; ÷ ) · ¤ «í< ÷~ (x+y) í¬·;+; ÷ (; parens ·; : ¬;í÷· ·-·( ·- ÷~
í¬·;+; ÷ (; paren (: ¬;í÷· ÷; ( ÷ ) · ¤ì condition ~ ·( ÷~ small parens “()” (+;( ÷ (; opening peren “(” (+;( ¤~« Auto Upsize
Start “On” +- ¬ ( ÷ ; - ·( clsoing peren “)” (+;( ÷ (; Auto Upsize End “On” +- ¬ ( ÷ ) ( ·( ~;ì +; , equation ~ division
;· ·; (; « parens ·+ ;· ÷ì (: ÷; ·;· · ) ·- «;+ -÷ (:ì +;¬ì perens ;·+ pi character selector dialogue box ~ (+ì ÷; +ì ¬;í÷·)
,¤ì · +;- < ¤- character ~;ì (+;· ·;( ÷ · ¤ (: Inegral, Summation, Radical etc. See another example:
These non-printable multicolor
rules indicates that ‘auto upsize
start’ is activated for this
character (radical).
easy way to defne BIG Parens, Integral, summation and radical...
· ¤; í+ ·÷¬ ÷ì ((;«; ·«; ÷ í+ powermath ~ ¤;- character default -· ¤ (+ (+;« ;( ÷ ;·+; í¤+ ++; font change +-+; ÷; (; ÷ )
-÷ì (;( automatically big parens, integral, summation «; radical (+;+ +ì, (; « (: ; ÷ì ;¤;+ ÷ ) ,¤ ÷~ ·+ <;÷-·; ¤ ¤~,( ÷ .
~;+ ¬ ( ÷ ÷~ (: parens (+;+ ÷
Step1: When you are making the small opening “(”
and closing “(” paren in pi character menu,
click on “Auto remap on”. ,¤¤ parens ÷~ ·;; ÷ì
mathematical font ~ ;« ·;
Step2: ( “(” (+;( ¤~« “Auto Upsize Start” +; activate
+- < ) (;í+ ·--( + ++( ;·+; (: ì opening paren
í~¬ ¤+ ) ¬ í++ ·+ (;( +; ·«;+ -÷ ;· opening paren
(+;( ¤~« “Auto Upsize End” +; activate ~( +-+;)
Step3: ( “)” (+;( ¤~« “Auto Upsize End” +; activate +- < ) (;í+ ·--( + ++(
;·+; (: ì closing paren í~¬ ¤+ ) ¬ í++ ·+ (;( +; ·«;+ -÷ ;· closing
paren (+;( ¤~« “Auto Upsize Start” +; activate ~( +-+;)
Step4: ( “)” (+;( ¤~« “Auto Upsize End” +; activate +- < ) (;í+ ·--( + ++(
;·+; (: ì closing paren í~¬ ¤+ ) ¬ í++ ·+ (;( +; ·«;+ -÷ ;· closing
paren (+;( ¤~« “Auto Upsize Start” +; activate ~( +-+;)
Step5: ( ;· “Key” ⌘3” select +- ; - í¤+ Font Correct +- < ) ( ·( ~;ì ·-
-( ·: ·ì powermath ·+ ;· « +;¬ì paren use +- ¬ ·;) ;·+; is dialogue box ~ ;+ +ì ·--( +÷ì ·: ·ì)
Step6: ,¤ì · +;- ;· “Key” (⌘5,7)” +; font ~;ì correct +- ¬ )

So this was the process of making big perens. Now by using same process you can excess big Summation, big Integral or Big
Radical. But if you forget to click “Auto Upsize Start” in opening and “Auto Upsize End” for closing, powermath will not work
automatically. Then in that case you will have to call these big character by using this Pi Character Selector dialogue box.
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  75
Confidential --- “Planman”
Integral Procedure (⌘⌥⇪J) (⌘F+I)
~;ì í·¤ ·+;- ÷~+ Pi Character dialogue box ¤ +;,
~;ì Character (+;+; ¤ì·;; ÷ ¤ì (-÷; ,¤ (;- ÷~ ,¤ì
Dialogue Box ¤ ·; ¬;÷ Integral Character (+;+;
¤ì·;·) ,¤~ +· ~;ì +«; +÷ì ÷) ;·+; ,¤ (;- red «; blue
character select +-+; ÷) ·¤; í+ ·÷¬ ((;«; ·«; ·;; í+
red characters are used for Integral, Summation and
Radical. Integral signs are mostly created in “ISUIP
or ISUIP 2k” font .
( +«;í+ ÷~ character (+;+; ·÷¬ ÷ì ¤ì·; ¬+ ÷
,¤í¬· «÷; ÷~ ++¬ ·÷ì options +; detail ~ ¤ì·;·
·; +« ÷)
Step1: Type “int” in Tag field/Select any Red Red-
ical Character from “show palette’
Step2: Edit
Step3: Font change ‘Characol’ to ‘ISUIP2k’
Step4: Save it and Get it.
As we have discussed earlier that we need to use
correct font only, rest of the configurations are
pre-set in powermath.
But if you are going to create any new character like bigint, smallint etc., which may have not pre-defined by ‘powermath pi
character’. Then it will take more steps:
Step1: Show Palette
Step2: Select Blue character (not black)
Step3: Hide Palette
Step4: Edit
Step5: Change Font
Step6: Show Font
Step7: Select required Character
Step8: Hide Font
Step9: SetConfguration
• BaselineOffset%: By using Baseline Offset, Integral sign can get down/up of base-
line. It is used for proper alignment and spacing between integral sign with upper
and lower limits (‘a’ and ‘b’).

• SpaceLeft%:Space left effects the space between ‘integral sign’ and ‘text before integral sign’.

• SpaceRight%:Space Right effects the space between ‘integral’ sign and ‘limits’.

76  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Planman”
• Horizontaland VerticalScale%: These effect the size of integral sign.

Step10: CharacterType:-Integral
• MainCharacter Count: Repetation of character. Means ·- ;·+; ·+ ÷ì
character 3 (;- ¬;í÷· (; «÷; 3 insert +- <ìí··) ,¤ ·+;- ;· ·+ ÷ì character +;
í+(+ì ~;ì (;- repeat +- ¤+( ÷) ·¤.

¬í++ «÷; « (;( ·«;+ <+ +;¬ì ÷ í+ « options According to the Integral, Summation and Radical change ÷;( ÷)
• Levles: It disturb the position of both the limits. It should be 3 otherwise integral sign will not display properly.
These are used when you need to have a small integral sign.

• LowerLimitKern: It disturb the position of lowwer limit. It should be set 3 otherwise lower limit will not set on
position properly.

• LimitIndex: It also disturb the position of both the limits. These are preset configuration in the shape of “index”
for the position of limits.

Step11: “Save”itand“Get”itinpowermath
t i p
Short Command for getting integral from “Pi character Dialogue box”: “⌘F + I
r e me mb e r
Powermath has its own hot commands, so always edit them as per job requirement. For example if you need to create the
integral sign then use hot command (⌘F + I), then edit it as per need. If you make your own integral with using blue
character from “palette”
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  77
Confidential --- “Planman”
summation Procedure (⌘⌥⇪J)
( (+ ÷~ Pi Character dialogue box ¤ +;, ~;ì
Pi character ;- Integral Character (+;+; ¤ì·; ¬+ ÷)
( ,¤ (;- ÷~ ,¤ì Dialogue Box ¤ ·; ¬;÷ Summation
Character (+;+; ¤ì·;·) ,¤ (+;+ +; (-ì+; ~;ì ¬·~;·
Integral (+;+ ·¤; ÷ì ÷) ;·+; ,¤ (;- ~;ì red «; blue
character select +-+; ÷) ·¤; í+ ·÷¬ ((;«; ·«; ·;;
í+ red characters are used for Integral, Summation
and Radical. Summation signs are mostly created in
“ISUIP or ISUIP 2k” font .
( +«;í+ ÷~ character (+;+; ·÷¬ ÷ì ¤ì·; ¬+ ÷
,¤í¬· «÷; ÷~ ++¬ ·÷ì options +; detail ~ ¤ì·;·
·; +« ÷)
Step1: Type “sum” in Tag field/Select any Red
Summation Character from “show palette’
Step2: Edit
Step3: Font change ‘Characol’ to ‘ISUIP2k’
Step4: Save it and Get it.
As we have discussed earlier that we need to use
correct font only, rest of the configurations are
pre-set in powermath.
But if you are going to create any new character like bigsum, smallsum etc., which may have not pre-defined by ‘powermath pi
character’. Then it will take the following steps:
Step1: Show Palette
Step2: Select Blue character (not black)
Step3: Hide Palette
Step4: Edit
Step5: Change Font
Step6: Show Font
Step7: Select required Character (summation)
Step8: Hide Font
Step9: SetConfguration
• BaselineOffset %: By using Baseline Offset, Summation sign can get down/up of baseline. It is used for proper
alignment and spacing between summation sign with upper and lower limits (‘a’ and ‘b’).

• SpaceLeft%: Space left effects the space between ‘summation sign’ and ‘text before summation sign’. ·- ·«;+ -÷
«í< ;·+ (÷( ·«;<; amount :;¬ì ·¤ 105 (; <;+; limits ~;ì í÷¬ ·;··ì)

• SpaceRight%: Space Right effects the space between ‘summation’ sign and ‘text after summation sign’. ·- ·«;+
-÷ «í< ;·+ (÷( ·«;<; amount :;¬ì ·¤ 75 (; <;+; limits ~;ì í÷¬ ·;··ì)

78  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Planman”
• Horizontaland VerticalScale%: These effect the size of integral sign.

Step10: CharacterType:-Summation
• MainCharacter Count: Repetation of character. Means ·- ;·+; ·+ ÷ì
character 3 (;- ¬;í÷· (; «÷; 3 insert +- <ìí··) ,¤ ·+;- ;· ·+ ÷ì character +;
í+(+ì ~;ì (;- repeat +- ¤+( ÷) ·¤.

• Levles: It disturbs the position of both the limits. It should be 3 otherwise summation sign will not display prop-
erly. These are used when you need to have a small summation sign.

• LimitIndex: It also disturb the position of both the limits. These are preset configuration in the shape of “index”
for the position of limits.

Step11: “Save”itand“Get”itinpowermath
set the position of limit(s)
By using “Summation Selector (⌘⌥E)”, we can fix the alignment of limits.
Step1: goto“SummationSelector”andchooselimitaligmentoption
Step2: nowgoto“PiCharacterSector”.SelectSummation
Step3 getitinpowermathwindow.
Different type of summation
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  79
Confidential --- “Planman”
radical Procedure (⌘r)
( (+ ÷~ Pi Character dialogue box ¤ +;, ~;ì
Pi character, Integral Character ;- Summation
Character (+;+; ¤ì·; ¬+ ÷) ( ,¤ (;- ÷~ ,¤ì
Dialogue Box ¤ ·; ¬;÷ Radical Character (+;+;
¤ì·;·) ,¤ (+;+ +; (-ì+; ~;ì ¬·~;· Integral and
Summation (+;+ ·¤; ÷ì ÷) ;·+; ,¤ (;- ~;ì red «;
blue character select +-+; ÷) ·¤; í+ ·÷¬ ((;«; ·«; ·;;
í+ red characters are used for Integral, Summation
and Radical. Summation signs are mostly created in
“Rads or Rads2k” font .
( +«;í+ ÷~ character (+;+; ·÷¬ ÷ì ¤ì·; ¬+ ÷
,¤í¬· «÷; ÷~ ++¬ ·÷ì options +; detail ~ ¤ì·;·
·; +« ÷)
Step1: Type “rad” in Tag field/Select any Red
Radical Character from “show palette’
Step2: Edit
Step3: Font change ‘Characol’ to ‘Rads2k’
Step4: Save it and Get it.
As we have discussed earlier that we need to change correct only font. Rest of the configurations are pre-set in powermath.
But if you are going to create any new character which is not pre-defined by powermath pi character. Then it will take the
following steps:
Step1: Show Palette
Step2: Select Blue character (not black)
Step3: Hide Palette
Step4: Edit
Step5: Change Font
Step6: Show Font
Step7: Select required Character
Step8: Hide Font
Step9: SetConfguration
• BaselineOffset%:By using Baseline Offset, Radical sign can get down/up of baseline.

• SpaceLeft%:Space left effects the space between ‘summation sign’ and ‘text before summation sign’.

• SpaceRight%:Space Right effects the space between ‘summation sign’ and ‘summation rule”.

• Horizontaland VerticalScale%: These effect the size of summation sign.

80  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Planman”
Step10: CharacterType:-Radical
• RuleWeight: By this you can fix the width of ‘radical rule’

• RuleOffset: It moves the position of ‘radical rule’ vertically. By using this option
you can set the proper alignment of ‘radical sign’ and ‘radical rule’. It must be properly aligned.

• RuleKern: It moves the position of ‘radical rule’ horizontally. By using this option you butt the ‘radical sign’ and
‘radical rule’ properly.

Step11: “Save”itand“Get”itinpowermath
(; ( ÷~ +;, ~;ì Pi character (up to 1024) ;¤;+ì ¤ (+; ¤+( ÷) ·¤.
Greek character
Math Signs
Special Character like accent characterss
Integral Equations
Summation Equations
Radical Equations...etc
stack Limit: superior/Inferior selector (⌘⌥⇪=)(⌘L)
~;+ ¬; ;·+; +· ,¤ (-÷ +ì equations í¬·;+ì ÷.

,¤ equation ~ ·;;¤ (;( « ÷ í+ «÷; limit 1 ¤ ·«;<;
(;- ·+ ÷ì ··÷ ·- ·- «; +ì¬ ; -÷ì ÷) ,·÷ stack
limits +÷; ·;(; ÷)
You can stack the limits by Stack Limit Procedure
in PowerMath. While inside a limit field within the
summation or integral procedure you can use a com-
mand ⌘L which will automatically stack the limits
above (if you are in a top limit) or below (if you are
in a bottom limit).
~(¬( í+ ,¤ (+;+ +; (-ì+; (÷( ;¤;+ ÷) ·( ~;ì ;·
·÷¬ì limit field ·- ÷; ;- ;·+; +÷ì <¤-ì stack limit
¬;í÷· ÷; (; ;· ·÷¬ì limit type +-+ + (;< ⌘L press
+- <) cursor ·+ ;· <¤-ì stack limit ·- ¬¬; ·;··;)
·( ;· ·- +;¬ì limit ·- ÷;· (; stacking ·+ ;·
·- ÷;·ì ;- ·( ;· +ì¬ +;¬ì limit ·- ÷;· (; stacking
·+ ;· +ì¬ ÷;·ì)
( ÷~ ¤~,· í+ ,++ì «;í+ stack limits +ì configration setting +÷; ¤ ÷;(ì ÷)
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  81
Confidential --- “Planman”
set the Confguration of Limits
In this dialogue box powermath provides pre-defined configured 20 styles of superior and infe-
rior. Either you can use them as they are or edit them as per job requirement. You can not create
any new style.
Here we will learn how do we set the configuration:-
• PointSize/SetWidth%:This is the size of limit.
• Superior/InferiorOffset:It effects the This is position of limit
• PiSpace:It should be 20.0 not confirm What is the meaning of this
macro Procedure (⌘⌥⇪I)
In this option of powermath, you can set repetitive
keystrokes as a macro. Often we see that there are
some characters or equations are coming again and
again. In that case we need not type them every-
time. We define that equation or part of equation
as macro
For example we need ‘8C’ (degreeC) character again
and again.
|deg|~rom~C~norm~
Now whenever we will need ‘8C’, we will just go in the
Macro Selector Dialogue box and select this macro.
Ultimetly we will get this combinatin of character.
Up to 100 macros can be defined. Each macro can
contain up to 256 characters.
82  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Planman”
matrix Procedure (⌘⌥⇪m)(⌘m)
( ÷~ Matrix (+;+; ¤ì·;·) ¤(¤ ·÷¬ (; ÷~ Matrix ÷;(ì +«; ÷ ,¤+
(;- ~ ¤+,· :-
A matrix is a collection of numbers arranged into a fixed number
of rows and columns. Usually the numbers are real numbers. In
general, matrices can contain complex numbers also. Here is an
example of a matrix with three rows and three columns:
row 1
c
o
l
u
m
n

1
The top row is row 1. The leftmost column is column 1. This matrix is a 333 matrix because it has three rows and three
columns. In describing matrices, the format is: rows3columns
Each number that makes up a matrix is called an element of the matrix. The elements in a matrix have specific locations.The
upper left corner of the matrix is row 1 column 1. In the above matrix the element at row 1 col 1 is the value 1. The element
at row 2 column 3 is the value 4.6.
,¤¤ ·÷¬ +ì ÷~ +;, Matrix (+;« ÷~ Matrix Option +; ¤~, ¬( ÷)
Input: Across/DownandDown/Across: matrix ;·+; í+¤ (-÷ type ·;;( (+;+ì ÷) ~((¬ í+ ;·
¬;÷ (; row wise (+; ¤+( ÷ ;- ¬;÷ (; column wise (+; ¤+( ÷) See the examples in right
AlignColumns: Center,Left,Right By these options we can fix the alignment of element in a matrix
Center

Left

Right
ComputeColumnWidths: GutterWidth: By this option we can fix the spacing between columns.
Gutter Width: 120%

Gutter Width: 60%
Numberof Rows/Column: ;·+; í·(+ by í·(+ +ì matrix ¬;í÷· ;· «÷; ¤ define +- ¤+( ÷)
333 233 232 133
After selecting/fixing these preference of matrix, type the elements of matrix. Your matrix is ready.
ComputeRowWidths: RowWidth: ,¤+; set +-+ +; option í(·+¬ ÷ì ¬· ·;+- ÷;(; ÷) For setting
the Row Width, press “⌘⇪L” (Math Level Offset%). By defalt it is set 70%. But for matching with lead-
ing you will have to change it into 60%. For example if point size/leading of equation is 10/12 then in
matrix you need to set block leading 12. But if you select 70% (level). Leading will be 12+2. So you will
have to change it to 60% for getting leading 12 within matrix. See the example below:
Row Width: 70%

Row Width: 60%
Across/Down

Down/Across Across/Down

Down/Across
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  83
Confidential --- “Planman”
Division/Fraction Procedure (⌘⌥⇪D)(⌘D)
Division/Fraction Selector Dialogue Box gives you
readymade 20 different division/fraction setup. You
can not create any new case fraction. You can only
modify them according to the job.
meaning of Division/Fractions
When a numerater and denominater are separated
by a math slash (Solidus) or horizontal bar is called
Fraction.
Build-up or Stacked Fraction: Full size (normal size)
numerator and denominator separated by a horizontal
rule/bar is termed as built-up (stack) fraction, e.g.
1
2
Heavy Fraction: Two built-up fraction included in a
fraction as a numerator and denominator is known as
heavy fraction. e.g.:
b ac
b b ac
a
2
2
4
4
2

− ± −
Fraction/BlockLeading: By adding 4 pts. in type size,
we can get base to base Fraction/Block Leading. This is
used in built up fractions (from base of numerator to base of denominator) and in matrices, arrays etc. e.g.:
a a
a a
11 12
21 22





 Block Leading

1
2
Fraction Leading
Division option:
DivisionRuleWeight:division + rule +ì thickness. ¤;~;·«(. «÷ 3.5 ÷;(ì ÷)

DivisionRuleOffset:division rule ¤ numerator/denominator +ì <-ì ,¤ option ¤ fix +ì ·;(ì ÷)

DivisionRuleOverhang:,¤¤ rule +ì width +; adjust í+«; ·;(; ÷)

RuleColor:

OpticalSpacingtoDivisionBar:
+¤ (; rule ¤ numerator and denominator +ì spacing “Rule Offset” + ,;-; set +ì ·;(ì ÷ ·-·( ;· «÷; ¤ maximum or minimum spacing
fix +- ¤+( ÷;) Here are the standard spacing.
Maxspaceaboverule:5.0 Minspaceaboverule:2.0 Maxspacebelowrule:5.0 Minspacebelowrule:2.0
84  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Planman”
Case Fraction Procedure (⌘⌥⇪h)(⌘h)
Case Fraction Selector Dialogue Box gives you ready-
made 20 different case fraction setup. You can not cre-
ate any new case fraction. You can only modify them
according to the job.
meaning of Case Fractions
CaseFraction: Index size numerator and denominator
separated by a horizontal rule/bar is called the case
fraction. e.g.:
1
2
Case Fraction options:
These Option are almost same as we have discussed in
“Divisions/Fraction Procedure”. There is only one dif-
ference and that is “point size”.
PointSize: As per standard it should be 65% of basal
text point size.
Rest of the options are same. You can see the standard
value of “case fraction selector” in the snapshot which
is given here.
If you need a case fraction without rule, then make a
seprate setup for that and fill “rule weight % 0”
math rule selector (⌘⌥⇪Y)(⌘Y)
By this option we can set “underbar, overbar, cancilation,
multiplerule”.
Math Rule Selector Dialogue Box gives you readymade 20
different “rule setup”. You can not create any new rule.
You can only modify them according to the job.
math rule options:
MathRuleOffset: It is the starting point of rule.
Means ·- ;·+; base text ¤ ·- rule -·;+; ÷ (; «÷;
positive value :;¬+ì ÷;·ì) ·- ;·+; base text ¤ +ì¬ rule
-·;+; ÷ (; «÷; negative value :;¬+ì ÷;·ì) ·- ;·+; base
text ¤ cancilation/diagonal rule ¬;í÷· (; ·- ¤ +ì¬ +
í¬· «÷; 0.0 value :;¬+ì ÷;·ì ;- +ì¬ ¤ ·- + í¬· «÷;
positive value :;¬+ì ÷;·ì)
MathRuleEndOffset: It is the Ending point of rule.
Means ·- ;·+; base text ¤ ·- ¤ì·;; straight rule -·;+; ÷ (; «÷; ~;ì (+ì ÷ì positive value :;¬+ì ÷;·ì í·(+ì ;·+ Math
Rule Offset ~ :;¬ì ·;ì) ·- ;·+; base text ¤ +ì¬ straight rule -·;+; ÷ (; «÷; ~;ì (+ì ÷ì negative value :;¬+ì ÷;·ì í·(+ì
;·+ Math Rule Offset ~ :;¬ì ·;ì) ·- ;·+; base text ¤ can cilation/diagonal rule ¬;í÷· (; ·- ¤ +ì¬ + í¬· «÷; negative
value :;¬+ì ÷;·ì ;- +ì¬ ¤ ·- + í¬· «÷; positive value :;¬+ì ÷;·ì)
Rest of the options are RuleWeightand RuleColor which will be selected as per job recuirement.
Compiled by:    deepak aggarwal  85
Confidential --- “Planman”
FewExamplesof MathRuleOptions
Name of tag equation math rule options
obar
ubar
can
dcan
ducan
Before typing the equation select both
the options “obar” and “ubar”.
styles selector (⌘⌥⇪s)
Alternate Style Selector Dialogue Box provides readymade
10 different “character configuration styles”. You can
not create any new style except those. You can only
modify them for italic, bold according to the job.
Index: It is used to set a short command which run with
command key. For example if you created a style “bf ”
with index “4” then whenever you will type anything
after pressing “⌘4”, it will be typed in bold face.
Split Alpha/Non Alpha: If we activate this option then
“Non-Alpha” will be activated. Just see the example below:
In this equation we need x and y italic and ‘0’ in roman.
For this purpose we will click alpha “Times Italic” and
non-alpha “Times-Roman”. Thus we will get all alpha-
bets italic and all numeric values “Roman.
So now you can set the styles for “roman, italic, boldface, bfit, fancy, greek, symbol....etc. as per job recuirement.
dfdfd t +í+í+
86  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential --- “Planman”
Force Level (⌘;)
+~;ì +~;ì ÷~ equation + í+¤ì part +; í(+; point size reduced í+« base line ¤ ·- «; +ì¬ set +-+
+ì ·--( ÷;(ì ÷) ·¤ì condition ~ ÷~ Force Level +; use +-( ÷)
By default « 0 (·;;( base line ·- set) ÷; -÷(; ÷) ·- ;·+; ·+ line ·- ¬;í÷· (; Force Level
value 1, (ì+ line ·- ¬;í÷· (; 3 :;¬ <ìí··) ,¤ì ·+;- ;· +ì¬ + í¬· (ì+ Force Level negative value
~ :;¬ <ìí··)
with
level 0
with
level 1
stacking (⌘⌥⇪t)(⌘t)
Stacking procedure allows characters to be positioned
above or below the baseline and horizontally aligned
including or excluding content along the baseline.
stacking options
Alignment: You can select the option as per your
requirement. Either Center, Left or Right.
«÷; ·- +;¬ì field +;+ì +ì¬ ; -÷ì ÷ ;- baseline ¤
¬·~;· í¬·+ ¤ì -÷ì ÷) ,¤í¬· ;·+; “with positive”
+; mannually ·;;:; ¤; ·- +-+; ÷;·;) ,¤+; (-ì+; « ÷ í+ ;· ·÷¬ “with positive” ·;;( ·- +;¬ì field +; select +- í+-
“control+up arrow” press +-( ¬¬ ·;· ·( (+ +ì ¤+ì position í(·+¬ :ì+ +; ÷; ·;·) ,¤ì ·+;- ·--( ·:+ ·- ;· +ì¬ +ì field
+; ~;ì ·- «; +ì¬ +- ¤+( ÷)
expected Fields
You can positioned the characters above, below or both.
You can create a stack that enables all three or any combination of two.


10
Macintosh - G5
Overview
10.1 iMac G5
10.2 Inserting a CD or DVD Disc
10.3 Front View of iMac G5
10.4 Back View of iMac G5
10.5 Desktop of iMac G5
10.6 Keyboard of G5 with Symbol
Overview
Your iMac G5 has been designed so that you can set it up quieckly and start using it right away. If you have never used an iMac
G5 or are new to Macintosh computers, read this section for instructions on getting started.
Picture of iMac G5
inserting a cD or DVD Disc
To install or use programs from a CD or DVD disc,
follow these steps:
1. Place the disc into the optical drive with the
label facing you.
2. When the icon for the disc appears on the
desktop, the disc is ready to use.
Chapter 3 Using Your iMac G5 43

Using Your Optical Drive
Your iMac G5 has a SuperDrive, which you can use to install software from CDs and
DVDs, play music from audio CDs, and play DVD movies. You can also burn your home
movies to make video DVDs that can be played in most home DVD players. You can
burn music CDs that can play in most CD players, and save documents or other digital
files to blank CD-R, CD-RW, DVD±R, DVD±RW, and DVD+R Double Layer (DL) discs
using the Finder. You can store nearly twice as much data (up to 8.54 GB) on a DVD+R
DL disc.
Important: The optical drive on your iMac G5 supports standard circular 12 cm discs.
Irregularly shaped discs or discs smaller than 12 cm are not supported. Noncircular or
small discs may become lodged in the drive. If a disc becomes lodged in the drive, see
the troubleshooting information on page 57.
Note: If you have older software that comes on floppy disks, contact the software
manufacturer to see if the software is available on a CD or for download from the web,
or purchase an external USB floppy disk drive for your iMac G5 from an Apple
Authorized Reseller, an Apple Store retail location, or the online Apple Store at
www.apple.com/store.
Inserting a CD or DVD Disc
To install or use programs from a CD or DVD disc, follow these steps:
1 Place the disc into the optical drive with the label facing you.
2 When the icon for the disc appears on the desktop, the disc is ready to use.
Note: Some DVD discs are two-sided.
Chapter 3 Using Your iMac G5 43

Using Your Optical Drive
Your iMac G5 has a SuperDrive, which you can use to install software from CDs and
DVDs, play music from audio CDs, and play DVD movies. You can also burn your home
movies to make video DVDs that can be played in most home DVD players. You can
burn music CDs that can play in most CD players, and save documents or other digital
files to blank CD-R, CD-RW, DVD±R, DVD±RW, and DVD+R Double Layer (DL) discs
using the Finder. You can store nearly twice as much data (up to 8.54 GB) on a DVD+R
DL disc.
Important: The optical drive on your iMac G5 supports standard circular 12 cm discs.
Irregularly shaped discs or discs smaller than 12 cm are not supported. Noncircular or
small discs may become lodged in the drive. If a disc becomes lodged in the drive, see
the troubleshooting information on page 57.
Note: If you have older software that comes on floppy disks, contact the software
manufacturer to see if the software is available on a CD or for download from the web,
or purchase an external USB floppy disk drive for your iMac G5 from an Apple
Authorized Reseller, an Apple Store retail location, or the online Apple Store at
www.apple.com/store.
Inserting a CD or DVD Disc
To install or use programs from a CD or DVD disc, follow these steps:
1 Place the disc into the optical drive with the label facing you.
2 When the icon for the disc appears on the desktop, the disc is ready to use.
Note: Some DVD discs are two-sided.
Compiledby:    deepak aggarwal 
Confidential---“PublishingServices”
Front View G5
Back View G5
14 Chapter 2 Getting to Know Your iMac G5

Back View
Headphone out/
optical audio
out port
Audio line-in port
optical
out
,
f
Video out port £
USB 2.0 ports (3)
d
Ethernet port
(10/100/1000Base-T)
G
FireWire ports (2)
H
Power buton
Power port
®
Memory access Security slot
12 Chapter 2 Getting to Know Your iMac G5

Front View
USB ports
Built-in
speaker
Ambient light
sensor
Integrated
infrared (IR)
receiver
Built-in
speaker
Remote rest
Slot-load
optical disc drive
Media Eject key
Volume controls
Built-in iSight
video camera
Built-in
microphone
Video camera
indicator light
Mighty Mouse
Apple
Keyboard
Power indicator
light
d
C
-
Remote
MENU
12 Chapter 2 Getting to Know Your iMac G5

Front View
USB ports
Built-in
speaker
Ambient light
sensor
Integrated
infrared (IR)
receiver
Built-in
speaker
Remote rest
Slot-load
optical disc drive
Media Eject key
Volume controls
Built-in iSight
video camera
Built-in
microphone
Video camera
indicator light
Mighty Mouse
Apple
Keyboard
Power indicator
light
d
C
-
Remote
MENU
  typesetting rules and regulations
Confidential---“PublishingServices”
Desktop of G5
Keyboard of G5 with symbol
LEADING
0
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96
102
108
114
120
126
132
138
144
150
156
162
168
174
180
186
192
198
204
210
216
222
228
234
240
246
252
258
264
270
276
282
288
294
300
306
312
318
324
330
336
342
348
354
360
366
372
378
384
390
396
402
408
414
420
426
432
438
444
450
456
462
468
474
480
486
492
498
504
510
516
522
528
534
540
546
552
558
564
570
576
582
588
594
600
606
612
618
624
630
636
642
648
654
660
666
672
678
684
690
696
702
708
714
720
726
732
738
744
750
756
762
768
774
780
786
792
798
804
810
816
822
828
834
840
846
852
858
864
POINT INCH
0
1/8
1
3/8
5/8
7/8
1
3
1/8
1
3/8
5/8
7/8
1
3
1/8
1
3/8
5/8
7/8
1
3
1/8
1
3/8
5/8
7/8
1
3
1/8
1
3/8
5/8
7/8
1
3
1/8
1
3/8
5/8
7/8
1
3
1/8
1
3/8
5/8
7/8
1
3
1/8
1
3/8
5/8
7/8
1
3
1/8
1
3/8
5/8
7/8
1
3
1/8
1
3/8
5/8
7/8
1
3
1/8
1
3/8
5/8
7/8
1
3
1/8
1
3/8
5/8
7/8
1
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
0
1
1
1
2
5
%
1
0
%
1
5
%

2
0
%
2
5
%
3
0
%

3
5
%
4
0
%
4
5
%

5
0
%
5
5
%
6
0
%
6
5
%

7
0
%
7
5
%
8
0
%

8
5
%
9
0
%
9
5
%

1
0
0
%
SCREEN
MM
1
0
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
0
8
0
9
0
1
0
0
5
1
5
2
5
3
5
4
5
5
5
6
5
7
5
8
5
9
5
1
0
5
1
1
5
1
2
5
1
3
5
1
4
5
1
5
5
1
6
5
1
7
5
1
8
5
1
9
5
2
0
5
2
1
5
2
2
5
2
3
5
2
4
5
2
5
5
2
6
5
1
1
0
1
2
0
1
3
0
1
4
0
1
5
0
1
6
0
1
7
0
1
8
0
1
9
0
2
0
0
2
1
0
2
2
0
2
3
0
2
4
0
2
5
0
2
6
0
2
7
0
RULE
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
e

7

8

9

1
0

1
2

1
4

1
6

1
8

2
0

2
2

2
4
U
s
E
3
0
E
3
6
E
4
2
E
4
8
E
5
4
E
6
0
E
7
2
E
8
4
P
O
I
N
T

S
I
Z
E

(
M
y
r
i
a
d

P
r
o
)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
0
BULLET
0
.
2
0
.
5
1 1
.
5
2 2
.
5
3 3
.
5
4 4
.
5
5 6 8 1
0
1
2
PICA
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
D- 1 0 3 , Ok h l a I n d u s t r i a l Ar e a , P h a s e 1 , Ne w De l h i - 2 0
P LANMAN  TECHNOLOGI ES
Knowledge

IT

Outsourcing
20 Nov. 2006

Compiled by  

deepak   aggarwal  

iii

Contents
1.  tYPesettInG        1
overview .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  2 Input   .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .   3
Project Row Data  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  3 Project supported Information   .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 3 standards of Client .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  3

Process    .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  5 .
task in the Book  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  6 Direct Task 6 Supporting Task 6 Work Procedure for each task  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  7 Analysis 7 Workflow CHARt  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 9 Art Workflow 9 Keying Workflow 9 Coding Workflow 9 Setup Workflow 10 Paging Workflow 10 Check Lists for Production (typesetter)  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  11 Setup Checklist 11 Coding Checklist 12 Galley Checklist 12 Paging Checklist 12 Uploading Checklist 12 other Reports   .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .   13 Quality Analyse Sheet (QAS) 13 Job Tracking Sheet (JTS) 14 Project Detail Sheet (PDS) 14 Grid  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  16

output/Uploading stuff .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 18

2.  eLements of Book        19

overview .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 20 front matter  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 21 main Body matter .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 21 Back matter   .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 22

3.  tYPesettInG RULes        23

overview .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 24 typography .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 25
Character .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  25 typefonts   .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .   25 typeface and typestyle  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  26 Leading   .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .   26
Confidential --- “Planman”

  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . Summation.  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .   49 Coding for Paragraph Style 49 Coding for Character Style 49 Coding for Formatting and Special Character 49 Coding for Fonts 50 Confidential --.  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 4.  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  42 .  .  .  .  .  . Equations 27 Fractions 27 Superscripts and Subscripts 28 Frances 28 Integral.  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 48 QuarkXpress Coding .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . Required System Fonts for Mac OS X v10 4 (Tiger) Required International Fonts manually cleaning up your system font and Application font folders   To Manually clean up your system fonts: 45 45 45 46 46 6. 5.  .  .  .  .  .  .  . Product and Union Symbols 28 Matrix and Determinatnts 28 Ellipses 29 Radicals (Root Sign) 29 Text and Math Slash 29 standard measurement  .  .  .  .  . 34 Proofreading  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .   29 Alignment and Indent   .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  26 special Characters (embellishing) .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  41 .  .  font mAnAGement        43 overview .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  31 overview .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  PRoofReADInG AnD PAGInG RULes        33 Printer/typesetter errors (Pe) .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  27 .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  27 math in typesetting   .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  CoDInG        47 overview .  35 International Copy editing symbol Chart    .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 44 Which fonts are necessary to mac os X    .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 31 .  .  .  .   38 Bad Breaks .  .  .“Planman” .iv   typesetting   rules   and   regulations Greek Characters  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 34 International Proof Reading symbol Chart  .  .  .  . Alignment 30 Indent 31 types of error   .  . 49 Xpress Coding (simple Coding)  .  .  .  . Galley Proofing Checklist 41 Page Makup Proofing (PMP) Checklist 41 QC Checklist 41 Revision/Revise Checklist 41 same Looking Character    .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  30 .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  39 Common Bad Breaks (avoid) 39 Paging Bad Breaks 40 Check Lists for Production (Proofreader)    .  .  .  .  .  .

  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .   53 Unicode  .  . XmL entity .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  50 XmL Version Declarations  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  63 styles D and e  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  53 Child element   .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  51 XML dtd Declaration 51 XsL (extensible stylesheet Language) .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  56 Paragraph and Character Style Attributes 56 Tables Attributes 56 Understand/Learn the other terms of InDesign XmL   .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .Compiled by     deepak   aggarwal   v Coding for Index  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  64 style G .  .   54 Importing XmL file .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . YoRk’s X-tABLe    61 Xtable’s seven styles of tables   .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  XmL In InDesIGn Cs2    49 XmL structure   .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  55 Manual Layout 55 Automatic Layout 55 What is mapping  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  50 InDesign Coding  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  53 tags  .  53 Content   .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  63 style C .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .“Planman” .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  52 .  .  .  .   53 Valid .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .   53 Getting started XmL with InDesign Cs2   .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 51 Coding for Paragraph Style Coding for Character Style Coding for Formatting and Special Character 52 52 52 7.  .  .  .  . 63 style A .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  50 X-tag Coding .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  53 Well formed  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  52 Root element .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  . 50 XmL Document  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .   57 Understand the Structuring Pane 58 Viewing XML tags 59 To Show or Hide Tagged Frames or Tag Markers 60 to Validate XmL structure .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .   53 Attribute .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  64 Confidential --.  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  51 XsL Declaration    .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  60 8.  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  51 Encoding Declarations 51 dtd (Document type Definition) .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  63 style B .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .   64 style f .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .  .

.

2  Process 1.3  Output .1 tYPesettInG Overview Typesetting Process 1.1  Input 1.

There can be various type of job/project in Typesetting field. Input and Output are directly associated with client wherever Process is connected with us (Production Team). In other words: Type + Setting = Typesetting (Typography Setting) Before going into deep. Generally there are three process in typesetting: 1. Now we will learn each step one by one. Magazines. like: Books. We will learn only those things which are neccessory to make our work smooth and quality holder. Process 3. . With advancing technology nearly all “typesetting” is now done on the computer. Note: Please note that this training is not a complete publishing training. We are not going to discuss on each and every topic of publising. Newspapers. we need to learn what is the procedure of Typestting. Output The entire typesetting is based on these three steps. Input 2. Journals etc.Overview typesetting A term that originally referred to the setting of lead type for printing presses or phototypesetting.

So by making the sample we get extra time for production indirectly. We use these specifications in all project untill client get changed them. Project supported Informations The data in the form of instructins. used for creating the design. In that case we will not be able to take any extra charge as well as client will also not happy with us. Text Files. we need to follow all the specification & design tips mention in the Artlog? Design Layout  Most the time client get created the design of the project by any freelancer and then send it to typesetter to follow that design.. preferences. Project Row Data 2. These standards includes “File Naming convention. Arts.. Design Layout. we can save our time in production. All Preferences. So there will be no chance of inconsistency in the job. When we create the artwork like Re-draw. Informations & Instruction which are provided by client. placement design of art.. Standard of Client Project Row Data The data which are compulsory for design the books. Saving Production Time: By having the project sample. sample  If we design all the elements coming in the project in a templete. As we will be having sample which is already approved by QC and sample is containing all the elements of book then there will be no more designing query in the mean time of production. ‘Input’ can be divided into three categories: 1.Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal    Input ‘Input’ is all the Material. Consistency: Sample contains all the element of book. Workflow of Job. which are neccessory for design the project. Sometimes client provides it or most of the time we create it inhouse by using the supporting files like specs. it starts after the approval of sample. Postscript/Pdf Option. So all the operator will follow that one sample for each chapter or unit. Re-labeling the Image or Flowchart etc. Saving rewrok and Resolving of Query in first stage. Benfits of sample making and getting approval: • Client Satisfaction: If we are not getting the approval of sample from client then in correction round client can mark or complain for any big design change/alteration. He sends these specification once. Printer Details. Description. Typesetter design the book according to that “Design Layout”. In typesetting field we must get the approval of sample before starting the project on production floor. design layout etc.. pattern volume. Confidential --. standards of Client Standard Rules & Regulation of every client which are used in each and every project provided by him. Got Extra time: In typesetting field whatever time estimate is given to client. Sample. Pattern Volume or Tearsheet etc. It contains almost complete information of art(s) of the project i. templete (Grid)  Template is an electronic file which contains all styles. Punctuation. master pages. te r m s Artlog  provides by the client. Greek Characters. If you are going to design 6th edition then the last five edition(s) will be called its pattern volumes. e. Art Log. Specs.“Publishing Services” • • • • .etc. number of each art. Pattern Volume or Previous edition  Previus edition book is called pattern volume.. color pallate. It includes. Templete. it becomes sample. Client can send the pattern tearsheet also after marking the alteration as design layout. Final Delivrable Format. This can be MSP. Project Supported Informations 3..

This is called “Supervision and Leading”. Journals. he ensures whether he is having all the neccesoory tools for repairing the schooter. If customer need scooter so much quickly then he will promise to give scooter on time at any cost.  typesetting   rules   and   regulations te r m s msP  Manuscript page: The book in typewritten or word processing form. ae. Food for his Mechanics. type  Trim – margins text  Trim – (margins 1 running head/running feet) Bleed  An element that extends to the trim is called Bleed. This is called “Maintaining Atmosphere for Work”. The standard of bleed is 9pt. Technical. This is called “Distribution of Job”. Like Lighting. project will remain four color project but if you use/add any spot color like “Pantone 3721 or any other pantone family” then this job will become 5 color project. This is called judge our Manpower. These are used for saving the printing cost and for giving the consistency in color. Step6: Now Shopkeeper tell his superviser to make this work done on time with superior quality. Step3: He judges his manpower whether he is having sufficient Mechanics. This process called “Appoint the Job Lead” Step7: Job Lead who knows the entire process of repairing he judges his manpower strength. trim  The final dimension of a book after the printer or bindery has cut it to size. such as “fi. Step8: In the meantime of job work. If you are creating any color by mixing of these four colours. Process Before understanding the typsetting process we see an example of a local scooter reparing service center. Step5: He trys to make the all necessory requirement for getting the scoorter repaired. Then steps of shopkeeper will be: Step1: Shopkeeper analyses the scooter (with the help of his best service man) and take an idea about how much work to do in scooter and what will be the cost! Then according to the market rate he let him know the exect expense for repairing. Designing Books etc. Sometimes client requires few pages highlited that can be identify without opening the book. If he get failed to meet deadline customer get unsatisfy. spot Colours  are premixed special colour. Accounting. job lead help his team member and get solved their all problemms. Generally we work in four plates .” types of Books ?  Sceintific. oe. characters that are bound to each other. What do you think according to you “what should be the process of that shop”? See: A Customer comes to Scooter Shopkeeper. fl. He distributes the work to require number of employee according to their knowledge and specilisation. Water.“Publishing Services” . Specially bleed is used for avoiding a white hair line in printing when we need to extend any art to trim. Mathematical (STM). In that case on those pages typesetter use bleed option. This procedure is called Judge the Avaailability of Tools. ‘Pantone Family’ is the best example of spot colors.CMYK. This process is called Analyses and Castoff Step2: Then Shopkeeper settles the delivery time (according to the customer need). which are available in print market indepently. That time is called Deadline. Ligature  In typography. Confidential --. If we have used spot colour in the book then acording to process of Printing Technology we require 5th pallate for print the spot colour. he says “my scooter is having the problem and I wanna get it repaired. Step4: Now with the help of his superviser. Remember: All the color are made by the combination of CMYK.

publishers or packagers. There are many types of indexes.) 5.“Publishing Services” . While a few publishers have in-house indexers. suggetion or requirements and status of work day to day. making a list of headings and subheadings (terms to appear in the index) and the location of each pertinent reference. Analyses and Castoff 2. on in electronic format. Introduce the QAR (Quality Analysis Report) for improving the quality day by day. clarity and consistency. Announce a Work Flow for job for running the project smoothly and maintain the consistency 9. Seats. If he does not have complete information. After completing the rough index the indexer edits it for structure. The process of creating an index is called indexing. Editing 2. Generate check list for every task for making consistency as well as avoding error. Setup and Compossing 6. task in the Book Now before moving ahead. Pagemaker. QuarkXpress. from cumulative indexes for journals to computer database indexes.Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal    There is no difference in Typesetting Procedure also. and a person who does indexing is called an indexer. Announce a Workflow of job for running the project smoothly and maintaining consistency. remove the grammetically mistake and inorm to client for any other modification in data. Proofing 7. often working from home. Most authors do not actually do it. He is responsible for improving the languare. Analysis 5. 12. or Framemaker etc. knowledge of the subject of book he can not improve the language or edit the terms. Art work 8. there can be unreasonable time pressure. editing  is done by editor. if required) 4. Judge the Availability of Tools (InDesign. Fix the Deadline (Give by Client) 3. Maintaining the Supporting Working Condition for all (AC. Who can create the Index In the United States. Distribution of Job to his colleagues according their knowledge and skills 8. Appoint the Job Lead for the project Work of Job Lead 7. Confidential --. XML (for web) supporting task The task which are indirectly connected with the project/book 9. we will see how many task may need to be done in a book. Inform his owner for everthing either complain. Since the indexer is very late in the production process. Generate all the supporting records for future reference and multi tasking. The indexer reads the page proofs. We differentiate the process in three categories: Owner/Management 1. 10. Judge the Manpower (appoint more employee. according to tradition. Who can do the Editing Only a person who is having entire knowledge of topic of the book can do the editing. Refreshment. 3B2. Direct task The task which are directly connected with the project/book. te r m s Index  is a systematic arrangement of entries designed to enable users to locate information in a document. How is indexing done? Often at the same time as final proofreading is being done by someone.. most indexing is done by freelancers.. improving the productivity. the index is the responsibility of the author. proofreads it and submits it to the client in hard-copy form. hired by authors. Lunch. Indexing 3.) 6.. We differentiate these task in two categories “Direct Task” and “Supporting Task”. 11. These are as below: Must Be in a Book May Be in a Book 1. formats it to specifications.. Keying 4.

This is the primary report. which are having all the genral information about the project.“Publishing Services” . Project Informations Report Project Number: ___________ PM: ___________ Project Name: ________________ Job Lead: ___________ Publisher: ___________ Level: ___________ Book Title: _______________________________________________________________________________________ ISBN: ___________ Platform: ___________ Author: ______________________ Program: ________________ # Color: ___________ Naming Convention: ______________________ Printer Name: ___________ Mansucript Pages: ___________ Cutomer Files Received: Design Layout: Sample: Specification (specs): Previous Edition’s Files: Element of Books: Cover(s): Box: Appendix: Shedule: To Comp: ___________ Castoff: ___________ First Pages: ___________ Ist Revise:___________ IInd Revise: ___________ Printer Test: ___________ Specification Informations Trim: _________________ Margins: Top: _______ Type: _________________ Bottom: _______ Text: _________________ Inside: _______ Outside: _______ Sample: ___________ Returned to Compositor: ___________ Returned to Compositor: ___________ Returned to Compositor: ___________ Files for Printer: ___________ Archieve: ___________ FM: Tables: Glossary: SO: Figures: Endnotes: PO: Examples: Credits: CO: Tips: Index: Hard Copy: Hard Copy: Soft Copy: Soft Copy: Templete: Hard Copy Book: Fonts: Liabrary: Final Product: ___________ Est.  typesetting   rules   and   regulations Work Procedure for each task Analysis A person who is having maximum knowledge of typsetting process. He is the first person. His responsibilities are: 1. only he/she can do the analysing perfectly. PIR: Project Informations Report:. Book Pages: ___________ Chapters Count: _________ Lines Per Page/base fonts: _________________________________________________________________ Fonts Used: ________________________________________________________________________________ Special Comments: ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ -________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Confidential --.

in a catalog. • MSP 124 is not elegible for reading.with five hundred years of tradition behind it. spine  Back of the book visible when book is on a shelf (closed). which appear on the ‘jacket’ and are used for publicity and promotional purposes. If client has provided only pattern volume’s hard copy. Now we will learn about : 1. • MSP 20 is missing. total flotting elements. Workflow 2. It is also known as “Pharma”. half-tone  Process of breaking a continuous tone image into dots for printing. Other Reports te r m s jacket  Short for “dust jacket. then analyser need to be mark configuration of style also. 16. Signatures run in eights: 8.e. 6.“Publishing Services” . line art  Black and white artwork such as pen-and-ink or pencil drawings. It show the width of book. blurb  text  Favorable quotes from other writers. Keep all related test msp/art msp in it. network.Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal    2. or in an advertisement. Tagging:. agents. enclosed all reports with mails and paas it to production. as on a flyer. 3. 5. Create Job Folder: At last he create the Job/Mail folder. frankfurt Book fair  The largest international publishing exhibition . Queries: Generate the Queries for client i. signature  A group of book pages that have been printed together on one large sheet of paper that is then folded and cut in preparation for being bound.” this is the paper cover/plastic cover on a book for keeping book clean.All the tag/style should have marked on MSP throughout so that production person can apply the correct tage. The fair takes place every October in Frankfurt. 4. Germany. or experts in a book’s subject area. Most commonly printers run books in signatures of 16 pages. celebrities. into the final volume. and writers from allover the world negotiate. PAR: Project Analysis Report:. 24.. Chapter Wise Folder: Generate the Folder for each chapter.This report tells about the numer of msp. along with the book’s other signatures. 32. A piece of written copy or extracted quotation used. Thousands of publishers. and buy and sell rights Confidential --. Checklist 3.

  typesetting   rules   and   regulations WoRkfLoW CHARt Art Workflow Start keying Workflow Start Coding Workflow Start Create Art Keying/OCR Editing 1PR Spell Check Coding 1CR 1CR Place in Templete QC Pass to Coding End End Error Yes No Pass to Typesetting End Confidential --.“Publishing Services” .

“Publishing Services” .Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal    WoRkfLoW CHARt setup Workflow Start Start Paging Workflow PMC Analyses RTS TPR Sampling 1PR Error Yes QC 1CR No QC Error No TPR Yes Error Yes 1CR Error Yes No PDF/Preflight No Pass to Typesetting PMU Uploaded End PMP End Confidential --.

. H&J Preferences Create Complete Style Sheet Ensure Correct Naming Convention of Style Sheet Ensure All Styles has been created Create Color Pallete Create all required Master Pages Create Sample Ensure All Element have Shown in Sample Create Liabrary Ensure All Neccessary Element have put in Liabrary Create Print Style Create Job Options for Creating PDF Create Xtag file for Coding (if require) Mark Styles on Sample for QC Mark Spacing on Sample for QC Part/ Section Opener Verso Recto New Page Chapter Opener Verso Recto New Page Chapter Ending Verso Recto Any Page Files Copied to WG Server Launch Meeting Send Query to Process Owener/Leader Responsible ___________ Date ___________ Confidential --. General. beta etc../Name _________ Job Title _________ Job Lead _________ Component ________ setup Checklist Job Folder Studied/Cross Check Analyse the MSP/Input Greek Characters (alpha.“Publishing Services” .) Italic Roman Math Characters (plus. No..) Symbol MathPi font Base font Math Programe Math Type Powermath In Math X-Math Create Font Folder Ensure All fonts are in Type 1 Format Correct/Update the Preference(s) Default. Character..10  typesetting   rules   and   regulations CHeCk LIsts foR PRoDUCtIon (tYPesetteR) J. minus etc.

eps Format Last Correction Followed Zero Erro Field Area Checked Print Style Correct All Files Copied to WG Server Confidential --.Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal   11 CHeCk LIsts foR PRoDUCtIon (tYPesetteR) J. No./Name _________ Job Title _________ Job Lead _________ Component ________ Coding Checklist Job/Mail Folder Studied Check MSP Sequence Tag Missing on MSP Author Supplied Text File Spell Check Description with Soft Copy Pattern Volume Punctuation per Client File Placed in Templete Copy Coded File into WG Server Responsible ___________ Date ___________ Galley Checklist Job/Mail Folder Studied Check MSP Sequence Check Latest Temp/Sample Document Prefences per Client Application Prefences per Client Check Extra Fonts All Extention Available New Tag in MSP Varify all tag Applied Create all Flotting Elements Zero Error Filed Area Checked Stacked Head Spacing Punctuation. Greek Letters Global Instruction Followed Responsible ___________ Date ___________ Paging Checklist Job Folder Studied Setup Checklist Reviewed Check Paging Guidlines All Art Available Place all Flotting Element Correctly Check Bad Break/Orphan/Widow Zero Erro Field Area Checked Check Font Attribute File Naming Convention Remove Extra Color/Styles Check Spread/Base Align Link Art Properly Responsible ___________ Date ___________ Uploading Checklist Check Date and Time File Naming Checked Prflighting OK All Font Embaded/Type 1 Art File High Resolution Art Files are in .“Publishing Services” .

RTS PMU PMC 1PR PMP FNL QAS (QUALITY ANALYSIS SHEET) Job Name : ____________________ Job Number: ____________ Chapter No. comments and total of pages on production floor. ______________ TSP: ____________ 1. Job Lead put the print of ‘JTS’ on the table every morning. So that next time everyperson try to avoid those mistakes. other Reports Now after production workflow and checklist we will discuss about the other reports which are made for controlling the tracking. Orphan. Everyperson fill his name in it and when task is completed or time is over. due date. See the speciman copy of QAS. ______________ TSP: ____________ 1. Affilation.) Alignment in Table (TCH. Widow Position of Figure and Table Wrong Paging 1PR PMP FNL 1PR PMP FNL TOTAL Quality Analyse sheet (QAs) Quality Analyse Sheet is introduced by management person for reducing the errors and costing in production. ______________ MSP: ____________ 2. According to this sheet. etc. Wednesday production floor for keeping the record of job distribution.12  typesetting   rules   and   regulations Till here. We can differentiate these reports in three catagories: 1. total type set pages (TSP). We have seen that all department are dependent to each other. responsible person. : _________ Total TSP: _______ Complexity/Level: _______ Total MSP: _______ Keyed MS (page numbers): : ___________________________________________________________ 1. For Improving the Quality and Reducing the Cost. Checklist are made for improving the quality and avoiding the silly mistake.. Display Heads. Wrong Fig. For Maintaining the Complete Project Details Job Lead: ______________ COD. TB) Bad Breaks. This is the responsibllity of each person to fill it properly. If art person is not doing his work on time than paginator can not perform his work on time. Means he gives beedback. he updates this sheet. ______________ TSP: _____________ 1PR TSP with Errors: ________________________________________________________________ PMP TSP with Errors: __________________________ Final TSP with Errors: _____________ Desktop Quality Check T1 Typography T2 T3 T4 T5 S1 Specs S2 S3 PG M kp P1 P2 P3 Typos Edit Missed/Incorrect See/Extra Copy New Mistake Introduced Art Error Style (spec related mistake) Zero Field Area (CN. ______________ TSP: _____________ 2. Author. Job tracking sheet (Jts) Remarks: This Component was finalised in Confidential --. These reports are made by the job lead or supervisor. 406-408 Total MSP/TSP in HAED_001: 29 17 LUCIRE F 21-Jun-06 2 2 Sampling Sudhanshu In process Total MSP/TSP in LUCIRE: 2 2 Grand Total MSP/TSP in Production: 173 162 Confidential --. ______________ MSP: ____________ 1. 2. Recd date. Abstract. In the evening job lead updated these information in electronic ‘JTS’ and next HAED_001 day he again gives the print of that updated Job Tacking Sheet. everybody’s task will suffer. These checklist are not only helping us to maintain the quality but also define the responsiblity of each person. their current status. ______________ TSP: _____________ 2. we have learnt about the various checklist. As well as if any person in this process makes the mistake. imporving the quality etc. We have understood the workflow of entire typesetting... ______________ TSP: ____________ 1. ______________ TSP: _____________ 2. This sheet is filled after each component of project. maintaining the records. RH.. ______________ TSP: ____________ 1.“Planman” Job Tracking Sheet is implemented on the JOB TRACKING CUM STATUS SHEET FOR 21 June 2006. For Controlling the Distribution and Tracking of Project. NAME & ID F/R RECD DATE DUE DATE MSPs TSPs TASK FOR RESPONSIBLE STATUS NEXT TASK RESPONSIBLE STATUS Next Task COMMENTS HR002_10 HR002_14 F F F F 21-Mar-06 09-Apr-06 07-Apr-06 09-Jun-06 09-Jun-06 62 62 9 9 71 52 10 10 RTS Deepak Raj Complete Complete Complete 1PR Pankaj Pinky In process In process In process Art to come 21-Mar-06 PMU PMC RTS PMP QC HR002_FM 29-May-06 29-May-06 Preeti Santosh Title page to come HR002_BM Poonam In process Total MSP/TSP in HAED_002: 142 143 HR001_IND F 12-Jun-06 13-Jun-06 29 17 1CR Deepak Complete QC Sudhakar Complete For Uploading Correction in pages 393-402. ______________ TSP: ____________ 1. This sheet is updated everyday HAED_002 by the job lead. So this is the sheet which tells all information of project. every person tells previous task performer about his mistakes. Everyperson in management can just see this sheet and get the complete information of work process and status. 404. total manuscript page (MSP). Thus neither he needs to go to each person for asking what LUCIRE they are doing nor production persons ask their work. ______________ TSP: _____________ 2. It also gives the reward to those employees who perform their work with quality. 3. CT. ______________ TSP: ____________ 2.“Publishing Services” . ______________ TSP: _____________ 2.

406408 HR002_12 R1 06-Jun-06 09-Jun-06 58 44 1 Deepak --- --- Raj Raj Raj Total MSP Recd.Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal   1 Project Detail sheet (PDs) Project Detail Sheet is generated by project lead.“Publishing Services” . There should be a seprated sheet for each project. 404./TSP Uploaded in HAED 002: 809 802 5 Confidential --.. blank pages etc.. Project Detail Sheet (PDS) NAME & ID F/R RECD DATE Uploaded On MSPs TSPs Blank Pages Editing/ Coding RTS 1CR PMU PMC Uploaded Comments HAED_002 HR002_10 F 21-Mar-06 09-Apr-06 62 71 0 --Deepak Deepak Deepak Deepak Deepak HR002_14 F 21-Mar-06 07-Apr-06 62 52 0 --- Raj Raj Raj Raj Deepak HR002_07 F 21-Mar-06 11-Apr-06 51 64 0 --- Preeti Preeti Preeti Preeti Deepak HR002_12 F 13-Apr-06 24-Apr-06 48 58 0 --- Poonam Poonam Poonam Poonam Deepak HR002_13 F 13-Apr-06 24-Apr-06 46 56 0 --- Pinky Pinky Pinky Pinky Deepak HR002_11 F 13-Apr-06 25-Apr-06 50 63 0 --- Raj Raj Deepak Deepak Deepak HR002_09 F 13-Apr-06 27-Apr-06 55 53 0 --- Preeti Deepak Raj Raj Deepak Minor editing Repaginate due to receiving of missing art Minor editing HR002_07 R1 29-May-06 06-Jun-06 64 52 1 Deepak --- Raj Preeti Preeti Deepak HR002_09 R1 29-May-06 02-Jun-06 53 50 0 Raj --- Preeti Poonam Poonam Raj HR002_10 R1 29-May-06 05-Jun-06 71 65 0 Preeti --- Poonam Pinky Deepak Raj Minor editing HR002_11 R1 29-May-06 04-Jun-06 63 56 0 Poonam --- Pinky Deepak Raj Raj Minor editing HR002_13 R1 29-May-06 03-Jun-06 56 50 0 Pinky --- Raj Raj Preeti Raj HR002_14 R1 29-May-06 04-Jun-06 52 48 0 Raj --- Preeti Preeti Poonam Raj Correction in page 87 HR002_FM F 29-May-06 09-Jun-06 9 10 2 Preeti --- --- Poonam Pinky Raj HR002_BM F 29-May-06 09-Jun-06 9 10 1 Poonam --- --- Pinky Raj Raj Correction in pages 393-402. This report is having the entire information of project like: • • • who was involved in the project how many tasks were done in the project Information about uploaded typeset pages. This report is also benefitial for calculating the actual costing of project.

indd 18 6/22/06 9:56:10 AM Confidential --.5 Typesetting Rules.spre Verso Top 2p6 2p6 Outside 3p 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 40 1 2 3 4 45 46 47 SPPhotina Regular 10/12 Inside 3p Trim 42p x 54p Type 36p x 48p1.5 Text 36p x 45p7.“Publishing Services” .5 Short Normal Long Bottom 3p4.

5 Text 36p x 45p7.5 Typesetting Rules.indd 19 6/22/06 9:56:11 AM Confidential --.5 Short Normal Long Bottom 3p4.ead Recto Top 2p6 2p6 Inside 3p 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 40 1 2 3 4 45 46 47 SPPhotina Regular 10/12 Outside 3p Trim 42p x 54p Type 36p x 48p1.“Publishing Services” .

fonts. math superset etc. Sometimes typesetter leaves mistake or sometimes client wants to make any alteration in the stuff.. 3. Like there should be no substitute fonts. sample. Archive Uploading: Almost all clients ask complete stuff in the last or after the printing. text files.. Revise(s): This is the feedback cum alteration from client. Fresh Uploading: This is the stuff that we upload to client very first time. Before uploading this stuff typesetter ensure about all checking regarding printing. It includes all project files alongwith supporting files i. layout.e. Confidential --.. he sends few/all pages back to typesetter for updating that.. Generally we upload PDF in this stage.“Publishing Services” . These feedback and alteration is called ‘revises’ from client. 2. page size. print style. 4.1  typesetting   rules   and   regulations output/Uploading stuff Now by using Input we have completed our project process and final files are ready to upload to client.. This can be upload in various step: 1. Client reviews this stuff and gives his feedback to typesetter. hi-resolution arts etc. InDesign/QuarkXpress files. All Uploading material is called output. art files. Final Print Ready Uploading: Now this is the final stuff which is now ready for printing.

2  Body Matter 2.1  Front Matter 2.2 eLements of Book Overview 2.3  Back Matter .

the Body Matter 3.Overview element of Books A book can be divided into three major devision: 1. the Back Matter (or end matter) These elements are presented in the book in an appropriate sequence. . Now in this chapter we will discuss all the element and their sequence. the Front Matter (also called preliminary mater or prelims) 2.

2. Chapter Sub-title. International Standard Book Number (ISBN). xiv Illustrations. It contains Part Number (PN). (e) Flotting Elements such as Figures. 2 Chapter Opener (CO) This is the third page of text matter. Explanation to theories.. technical papers or preprint etc. step. vii Epigraph In case there is any Poem/Quotation with it source is coming in FM. B.. Publisher’s or Printer’s Name and details. Generally big books are divided into different parts. 3. 3 Glossary Details of Technical terms used in the book which are generally set in alphabatically order and smaller type size than the text. x Preface/Foreword The author’s own statement about the work is usually called Preface. Body text contains the following elements: (a) Headings such as level A.. Wherever Foreword is the statement someone other than the author. xii Acknowledgement It may be containing the information about those Persons/Sources who contribute their roles to write the book. where list. It is also known as “Bastard Page”. It contains Chapter Number. iv Copyright Page This Fourth page always prints on back of the title page (means on verso page). Section.“Publishing Services” .. If there are two or more Appendices. Box. thesis. method of research etc. Book Price etc.Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal   1 front matter It appears at the beginning of the book. Half Title Page always starts from the recto page and the following verso page is generally left blank. Tables.. ii. The folio of all pages in FM set only roman numbers (i. There could be citation or journals.. Introduction. viii Table of Contents Brief Content or/and Table of Contents shows the content of entire book with there reference page numbers. iii.. The folio of all pages in BM set only arabic numbers (1. This page includes the information about Part. iii Title Page This third recto page shows the Title. i main Body matter This is the biggest part of the book. B C etc. Edition Number. Text generally starts with Part Opener.. Author Information. conference proceedings. 2 Reference list/Bibliography This is a detailed list of author’s work or suggeted readings. Titles and Heading Levels with their beginning page numbers. Element which generally appear as Front Matter are as follows: Half Title Page This is the first page of the book. Abbreviations. Sub-section. Element which generally appear as Back Matter are as follows: 1 Appendix (ces) Additional material which is not included in the text but is useful to the reader for clarification like: Text of documents. 2. Blind folio is used in this page. bullet. cited in the text...). this type of dedication lines are set on 5th recto page. which shows only title of the book. Element which generally appear as Main Body Matter are as follows: 1 Part Opener (PO) This is the first page of the body text.. Long list of Tables etc.Chapter Opener Style must be same for each chapter opener page. Back matter It appears at the end of the book. It shows the information about the Copyright Registration. Footnotes.). 3 Body Text These are the continued page of Chapter Oener. Part Title (PT). Preface includes reasons for undertaking the work.. Following page is generally left blank. books. Following page is generally left blank. v Dedication “This book is dedicated to my son”. The folio of all pages in Body set only arabic numbers (1.. Next Chapter Opener pages may start from new page as per instrcution of client.. C. Followed page generally goes blank. First Chapter always starts from recto. Chapter. Chapter Opening Heads and Chapter Opening Text.. Publisher’s Detail/Logo etc. (c) Equations (Text and Displayed) (d) Extracts or Quotations. D..). 3. This page is set on Recto page. These are the other elements of Front Matter. This page is set on Recto page.. This page is set on Recto page. they are lablelled A. Heading to Appendix is always A-head.. Examples. Part Opener Page always starts from the recto page and the following verso page is generally left blank. Confidential --. it will set on vii page of FM as Epigraph page. Chapter Title. (b) List such as number. Each section generally starts from Recto.. Back Matter is known by End Matter or Rear Matter. Mathematical derivations..

If it set in bottom it is called running feet. 5 Index A list of information of particular terms/names which have used in printed book with there reference page number.“Publishing Services” .).. Each elements in the front matter normally carried the same running head on verso and recto pages. title. If it goes to top it is called running head. 6 Errata and Addenda The corrections (if any) recieved by the publisher from the author too late to incorporate into print. Generally Index set in two or three column.20  typesetting   rules   and   regulations 4 End Notes List of the notes which are cited in the text. Verso Recto Contents Contents Index. copyright. CO etc. This is same like the footnote.. Index Running Heads in text According to the structure and nature of the book. PO. they are generally set under the head Erratum (Errors) and Addenda (add something) te r m Running Head/feet  The headings at the top/bottom of the page. dedication. acceptable arrangement of running head or running feet are following: Verso Recto Verso Recto Part Title Chapter Title Chapter Number Chapter Title Chapter Title Subhead Chapter Title Chapter Sub-title Author Name Chapter Title Sub-head Sub-head Confidential --. Footnote are set page to page wherever End Notes are set in the last of book. Main heading of Index set alphabatically. which never set on display pages (half title.

3  Typesetting Guidelines .3 tYPesettInG RULes Overview 3.2  Type of Errors 3.1  Typography 3.

Client’s Error . Printer Error 2. Character Typefonts. 8. 6. 3. Typeface and Typestyle Leading Greek Characters Special Characters Math in Typesetting Standard Measurements Alignment and Indent type of errors 1. 2. 5. 4. 7.Overview typography 1.

Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal   2 typography Character A letter. 6. Courier. Cap Height: Height of capital letter from top to bottom. Baserville etc.. g. Meanline: An imaginary line which goes parallel to baseline from top of lowercase (small) “x”. typefonts Different type of fonts.g. We can differentiate fonts in following different categorise: 1 Serif Fonts: Edge in the font. e.. f etc. e. Blackboard Boldface Fonts: Character with double backs are often used by mathematicians to indicate boldface on the blackboard. Italic. 3. Wideface etc. Bold.g. x-height: Height of a lowercase ‘x’ from top to bottom. 2 Sans Serif Fonts: Without edge. Times New Roman.: Ag Ag Leading Confidential --. Generally these characters are typset in bold face. This is always measured between base of the first line to base of second line (b/b). Characters with a small lines projecting from the top or bottom of the main strokes of a letter of character is known as Serif font. Ascender: Character which extends above the x-height or meanline. Baseline: An imaginary line where all characters stands. Condensed. Character without serif e. p. Each character stands on an imaginary base line. 2. A type font my be Roman. Davis hand. Prestige elite etc. . 6. cap and small cap (C/sc). Typewriter Fonts: Character looks like typewriter printout e. Balleve etc. Line Printer etc. 3. Typestyle: There are various styles of typesetting the elements such as: ALL CAPS.: . b. which is gererally used to set comuter language and statement e... 4. e.. Script Fonts: Artistically drawn character which looks like handwritter fonts e. Cap & Lowercase (C/lc) and Initial Cap (I/c) Leading Leading: Space between lines is called Leading. 5.g.g.Hieght 1. Monospace Fonts: Each character in this type has same width. 5. numeral. Hieght Abcdefgpqx Baseline Descender x.. 4. q etc. This is also called the One Line Space.g. e. d. e.g..g.  typeface and typestyle Typeface: The body or face characteristics of a complete font of type.“Publishing Services” . Descender: Character which extends below the ‘x-height’ or baseline.g. Technical Terms of the Character: Ascender Meanline Cap.g. ITC American Typewriter. small caps. Centuary etc. Helvetica. symbol or mark of punctuation is called the character.

Proofreaders have to give more attention which checking mathematical settings. 12 is Type Point Size. if necessary. unless otherwise specified by the publisher. in 9/9 pts. We generally use TeX/LaTEX for math setting. Lower Case Greek Character a 5 alpha b 5 beta c 5 psi d 5 delta e 5 epsilon f 5 phi g 5 gamma h 5 eta i 5 iota j5 xi k 5 kappa l5 lemda m 5 mu n 5 nu o 5 omicron p 5 pi q 5 vartheta r 5 rho s 5 sigma t 5 tau u5 theta v5 omega w5 varphi x 5 chi y 5 upsilon z 5 xi Upper Case Greek Character C 5 Psi D 5 Delta F 5 Phi G 5 Gamma J5 Xi L 5 Lamba P 5 Pi Q 5 Theta S 5 Sigma V 5 Omega special Characters (embellishing) Any character can be embellished with dots. bars. Generally we follow the copy editors marking on the manuscript for spacing. 20 is Leading. to clear ascenders or descenders of adjoining lines. Confidential --.Font Size In 12/14 point typesetting. Displayed Equations (DE): When equations are displayed with special setting in seprate lines. arrays etc.g. Generally Cap Greek Letters are set in Roman and Lowercase Greek Letters are set in italic. Visual Space: White space between lines is called ‘Visual Space’. alignment and breaking of DE. Conversion Formula: Visual Space = Leading . Embellished characters should be clearly illustrated. accent or mathematical symbols. Visual Space 2 Greek Characters Ag Ag Type Size 12 Leading 14 Greek Characters are very commonly used by authors for expressing the variables.2  typesetting   rules   and   regulations Fraction/Block Leading: By adding 4 pts. equations In line or Text Equations: When equations appear in the text lines. If double embellishment or embellishment under characters or over cap-height chara cters are called for in text.“Publishing Services” . in type size. The first 9 is type size and the second 9 is leading.g. e. we can get base to base Fraction/Block Leading.g. We will read those rules in coming chapter (Paging Rules and Regulation). we follow the few rules. e.: ü 5 umlet é 5 accute è 5 grave option u then u option e then e option ` then e ñ 5 tild î5 ◊ 5 circumfles option n then n option i then i command + shif v ç5 å5 … 5 ellips option c option a option math in typesetting In typesetting it is very difficult to express the math. If a displayed equation does not fit on the measure and the preferred break points are not marked on the manuscript..: Block Leading  a11 a  21 a12  a22   1 2 Fraction Leading Solid Leading: Typsetting without giving the white space between lines is called Solid Leading. So Visual Space will be 2 point. or something from te xt to text also. This is used in built up fractions (from base of numerator to base of denominator) and in matrices. extra leading is added. e. In text we always measure from base to base. but when any flotting element comes with in the page then we need to measure space from figure to text.

Angle brackets depend on the math situation. There are six types of fractions. e.: g12.“Publishing Services” . superscript will follow subscript that is straggered style.g. ∑ x . e. They are called superscript and subscript based on the position. or are fences. But Union symbol will be set always in one line size unless specifically marked to be set larger. Matrices are set in cloumns and rows in rectangular array.g. Product ( ∏ ) and Union ( U ) Sysmbols are collective math signs and can be set in one. The simple two-by-two matrix a a    a  can be set in text.g. two or three line sizes. 1 2 Shilling Fraction: Full size (normal size) numerator and denominator separted by a solidus (math slash) is the shilling fraction. limits are set above and below. e.g.: 1 2 Special Fraction: Index size numerator and denominator separated by a horizontal rule/bar is called the case fraction.: b 2 − 4ac −b ± b 2 − 4ac 2a superscripts and subscripts When a character or word appear in superior or inferior position that is generally set in smaller point size than the normal text.: g2.: ‰ Build-up or Stacked Fraction: Full size (normal size) numerator and denominator separated by a horizontal rule/bar is termed as built-up (stack) fraction. Complex Fraction: When two types of fractions are included in a fraction as numerator or denominator. kn). Braces {}. 23. e. Double brackets and Bars . summation. Brackets []. Summation ( ∑ x ). that is called complex fraction. in case of limits to an integral are always set to the right of a single symbol and above and below multiples. 1 1 1 2 2 x+y 2 In text limits are set to the right of the symbol as sub and superscripts. Center dots are used between operator signs (for example: k1 1 k2 1 … 1 kn) and and lower dots are used between and after commas or semicolons (for example: k1. e. k2. ∑x + y = 2 2 matrix and Determinatnts Mostly the matrices are set as display unless the publisher allow spreading of lines in text.g. e. Product and Union symbols The Integral ( ∫ x + y ). e. 11 12 21 22 ellipses Three lower dots or center dots used to indicate an omission (for example 1. The fractions are generally set as case a fractions. . Case Fraction: Index size numerator and denominator separated by a horizontal rule/bar is called the case fraction. Staggered Style: If superior and inferior are to set out of a alignment. Generally in text we use one line symbols and in case of displayed equations it is set in two lines symbol.g. The size of fences may Integral.g. in displayed equations. The columns in the matrix are spearated by 1 En space. frances Parenthesis (). 5).: 1 1 2 However.Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal   2 fractions When a numerater and denominater are separated by a math slash (Solidus) or horizontal bar is called Fraction. Determinant is set in the same manner as a matrix except that straight lines are used instead of brackets. For example. ….g. e. 1 23 Heavy Fraction: Two built-up fraction included in a fraction as a numerator and denominator is known as heavy fraction. they are set aligned or stacked on left immediately 1 to the right side of the character they are associated with.g. …. Stacked Style: If a character is followed by both subscript and a superscript. Confidential --. e.

Alignment and Indent Alignment Aligning the lines into the measure is alignment. 2 pt. When radicals with inculum bars appears in text. • The type page is measured in “picas”. and three line sizes. This is very minor space which is generally used or added between avoiding of characters. This is also known as “ragged right”.g.“Publishing Services” . Math Slash: It is little bit bigger than the text slash that is used in mathematical fractions. Measure Ros nullaorem zzriurem endipisim ipit accum verit ad modionsed dolessim zzriliquis nulla faccums andipiscin ulla conulpu tatummy num acincil irit doles Left Alignment: When lines are aligned from left side only and leaving the right side ragged.g.g. text and math slash Text Slash: It is little bit smaller than the math slash that is used inplace of word ‘Per’. standard measurement The units of measurement or the scale used in typesetting is called “Pica Scale” • The trim is measured in “inches”. • The leading (interline spacing) is measured in “points”. e.: 1 2 . This is also called as “Regular/Word/Math/Operator Space” Thin Space: 1/6 of Em space. in 10/12. Different types of alignments commonly used in typesetting are given below: Justified Setting (Both Side Alignment): When lines are aligned from both sides. Km/h (Kilometer Per Hour). This is also called as “Figure Space” or “Nut Space” Thick Space: 1/3 of em space. • The size of the type is defined in terms of “point”.: 9 point em should be 9 point wide. two-. The overscore or vinculum bar can be set above a single symbol or a set of symbols. Hair Space: 1/16 of em space.2  typesetting   rules   and   regulations Radicals (Root sign) Radical Signs ( ) can be set in one-. A thick space will be used between the end of the expression and the symbol that follows. additional leading may be added if necessary to clear descenders from the line above. Remember: 1 pica 12 points 1 inch 6 pica 1 inch 72 points Em Space: A unit of measurement which is equal to the point size of character (e. The bar will be exactly of the same length as that of the matter there under.) En Space: 1/2 of em space. e. Measure Ros nullaorem zzriurem endipisim ipit accum verit ad modionsed dolessim zzriliquis nulla faccums andipiscin ulla conulpu Center Alignment: Aligning the lines to the center of measure. Measure Ros nullaorem zzriurem endipisim ipit accum verit ad modionsed dolessim zzriliquis nulla faccums andipiscin ulla conulpu tatummy num acincil irit doles Confidential --. em space will be 10 pt. Measure Ros nullaorem zzriurem endipisim ipit accum verit ad modionsed dolessim zzriliquis nulla faccums andipiscin ulla conulpu tatummy num acincil irit doles Right Alignment: When lines are aligned from right side only and leaving the left side ragged.

g. and so forth. and how much spacing to insert where needed. Figures. Author Alterations (AA) Editor’s Alterations (EA) Designer’s Error (DE) Office Corrections (OC) Confidential --. Mistakes in inserting code symbols may result in errors.: Measure Ros nullaorem zzriurem endipisim ipit accum verit ad modionsed dolessim zzriliquis nulla faccums andipiscin ulla conulpu Paragraph/First Line Indent: When the first line is indeneted from the left hand margin and the following lines are set full measure. Measure Ros nullaorem zzriurem endipisim ipit accum verit ad modionsed dolessim zzriliquis nulla faccums andipiscin ulla conulpu type of errors When the type is to be set by using the computer.g. Printer/typesetter errors (Pe) Any error which is not corrected by the typesetter at the proof stage will be treated as Printer’s Error (PE).: worng setting of flotting elements. Tables. There are different types of typesetter error: Typographical Error or Typos: Typesetter’s error during data entry is known as Typographical Error or Typos. Such errors are usually caught and rectified before the proofs are sent to the publisher.: Inconsistency in Variables/ Fractions Style/Greek letters/Global spelling etc.Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal   2 Indent Leaving the space from left/right side or both side of text into the measure is called “Indent”. Engironment. There are three types of common indent: Constant Indent: Leaving constant or regular/continued space from all lines of text is termed as “Constant Indent” Measure Ros nullaorem zzriurem endipisim ipit accum verit ad modionsed dolessim zzriliquis nulla faccums andipiscin ulla conulpu Hanging Indent: In this case the first line is set full measure and the turnover are indented. Additional erro marked in proof by the client which was not shwon in the manuscript and not informed to the typesetter at the typesetting stage. Formatting Error: Typesetter’s error that occurs during data setting. we call it “Paragraph Indent”. e.“Publishing Services” . All such Client’s Error are chargeable to the client. e. subscript or superscript are to begin and end.g.g. e. e. Page Makup Error: Typesetter’s error in pagination.: Wrong placement of flotting elements. Copy Edit Error: Typesetter’s ommission in following the copy editor’s marking or instruction..: Spelling Mistake. the text elements are usually coded to indicate matters such as where and how to set Heading. When italics (or boldface). e.g. We can categoriesed these errors in two parts: (1) Printer or Typesetter Error and (2) Client Error.g. e. Missing text.

.

5  Checklist for Proofreaders .2  International Copyediting Marking/Symbols 4.4 PRoofReADInG AnD   PAGInG RULes Overview 4.1  International Proofreading Marking/Symbols 4.4  Workflow for Proofing 4.3  Bad Breaks 4.

both the mark tell to operator ‘what to do’. which should be complete in all respects. (See International Proof Reading Symbol Chart) For more than one correction in the single line. Therefore it is neccessoity to have the complete knowledge of international proofing symbol. pen/pencil are the essentials tools require for proofreading. . Beside this he/she should have a fair knowledge about the job style.Overview Proofreading Proof Reader should follow a uniform standard and marking the proof because that is considered to be important way of communication between computer operator or programmer and the proof reader. make two marks: one within the text in the exact place whree the correction is to be made and second in the side to the line in which the error occurs with a proper sequence. never alter the original matter of manuscript when correcting the proofs. Make all alteration on the proofs. It is imperative that the person should be familiar with all the proofreading markings before starting proof reading work. Thus. Rather the discrepancies may be queried to author. When you find the error. fogged or overprinted which is not in the visible condition so that you will not face the problem in mean time of proof reading. Also. Never try to squeeze corrections between the printed lines. specifications and other requirement of publisher. Have a quick glance through the galleys/manuscript to see if there is any page missing. Proof reader are supposed to follow the original manuscript copy and do not make any changes on his own. This include the manuscript. ensure all necessary materials are available.mark the corrections from left to right in the nearest margin. check for obvious blown. galleys and specifications. Pica/E-scale. Before commencing the job.

TechBooks’ Quark Documents Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal   1 International Proof Reading symbol Chart 24 Confidential --.“Publishing Services” .contd.. on page 30 ..

2  typesetting   rules   and   regulations TechBooks’ Quark Documents International Proof Reading symbol Chart (continued) Confidential --.“Publishing Services” 30 .

Compiled by:  

deepak   aggarwal   

speciman Copy of Page after Proofing

Figure 2

Confidential --- “Publishing Services”

Portion of a corrected galley.
9

 

typesetting   rules   and   regulations

International Copy editing symbol Chart

Confidential --- “Publishing Services”

Compiled by:  

deepak   aggarwal   

Bad Breaks
When a word, line, para or page break is not correct and general typesetting rules are not followed, it means there area bad breaks.

Common Bad Breaks (try to avoid)
1 Orphan line: First line of a paragraph set alone at the end of a page is ‘Orphan line” 2 Widow line: Less than 2 lines at the top of the page is not allowed except for any line enditng with a colon and followed by list or equation. 3 Orphan word: Less than five charaters, including punctuation at the end of paragrpah is ‘Orphan’. 4 River: White space between words as a column in consecutive lines that looks like a river of white space, which is also known as ‘Pigion Hole’. This is generally not allowed. 5. Don’t hyphen already hyphenated word. 6. More than two same words or three same characters in consequtive lines in a paragraph is not allowed. 7. Don’t break line before the punctuation. (break line after punctuation always) 8. Never divide units/short abbreviations from its related number. e.g.: 750 ft., 100 m. 9. Never break function from its arguments. e.g.: sin x, cos x. 10 Never break before solidus (slash; /). Break after the solidus and never set hyphen after breaking the solidus. 11 Never break displayed equaiton (DE) after the math operator sign. Break DE before operators and set turnover lines flush left. 12. Never break inline equaiton before the math operator sign. Break text equation after these signs and set turnover line flush left. 13 Wrong word break should be avioded. Follow Webster’s or any other standard word break dictionary for ensuring correct word breakin.g 14. Don’t break words with less than five characters. Break after minimum two characters and carry over minimum three characters or a word. 15. Don’t break the names of person, initials, rank and degree. 16. Don’t set text list numberr/letter alone at the end of line. 17. Never break title, headings. Not use hyphenate in them. 18. Don’t set clash characters, add kerning there. 19. Avoid too loose line when lines show more than En space between words. 20. Avoid too tight line when lines show less than thin space between words. 21. Don’t allow hyphenation in ragged setting (R/R or R/L) unless required by specifications. 22. Don’t set more than three pica ragged line in ragged setting.

Paging Bad Breaks
23 Avoid hyphenation at the end of verso page. But never allow at the end of recto page. 24. Never allow hyphenation at the end of verso page if it is followed immediately by a full page Figure, Table or any other flotting element. 25. Never set running head and folio on the opening page of the “part/chapter/article. Set drop folio there if specification allow. 26. Don’t set less than five text lines on chapter opening page. 27. Don’t set less than six text lines on the last page. 28. Don’t set less than five text lines below a full page Figure, Table, or Box. 29. Don’t set less than three text lines below the H1 at the end of page. 30. Don’t set less than two text lines below the H2 and all other inferior headings at the end of page. 31. Never adjust/squeeze space below the heading to adjust the page length. 32. Carding: Adding vertical space between lines and paragraph is not allowed, unless specification permist. 33. Kerning: Adding/Reducing too much (more than 13/23) space between characters it not allowed. 34. Consecutive spread should not vary by more than one line. 35. Never float unnumbered figures/tables. Place these elements exctly where shown on the manuscript. 36. Don’t set any flotting element verticle if their width is above 2 pica more than text width (up to 2 pica is permissible). If more than 2 pica than set wider flotting element horizontal/landscape or verticle/broad side of the page with drop folio (remove running head in that condition).
Confidential --- “Publishing Services”

No.“Publishing Services” . End) Check Styles against Sample Check Pagination Check Citation of Flotting Elements Check Art and Caption Randomly Check Style/Spacing of Heads. Boxes Check Spread Alignment Check Bad Breaks/Orphan/Widow Check FM/BM Sequence and Style Check & Update TOC from Final Pages Check Zero Field Area Carefully Responsible ___________ Date ___________ QC Checklist Job/Mail Folder Studied Check Edit Randomly Check RH/Folio/DF Randomly Check New page or Racto Opening Check Blank Page (PO. CO.  typesetting   rules   and   regulations CHeCk LIsts foR PRoDUCtIon (PRoofReADeR) J. List Check Spread/Base Alignment Check Bad Breaks/Orphan/Widow Check FM/BM Sequence and Style Check TOC Create/Mark Queries Check Zero Field Area Randomly Responsible ___________ Date ___________ Revision/Revise Checklist Mail Folder Studied Check Edit Carefully Check Running Head/Folio/DF Check Paging if Reflow Check Figure & Caption if Repaging Inform client about Index if Repaging Confidential --. List./Name _________ Job Title _________ Job Lead _________ Component ________ Galley Proofing Checklist Job/Mail Folder Studied Check MSP Sequence & Counting Check Slug Line Check Citation of Flotting Element Check Punctuation/Greek Characters Check Math Style Check FM/BM Style Check Style of Flotting Elements Responsible ___________ Date ___________ Page makup Proofing (PmP) Checklist Job/Mail Folder Studied Talley Correction Carefully Check Edit thoroughly Check RH/Folio/DF thorouout Check New page or Racto Opening Check Blank Page (PO. End) Check Style against Sample Check Placement of Flotting Elements Check Citation of Flotting Elements Check Art and Caption Check Style of Heads. CO.

lc (p) and Greek lc rho (r) — Letters cap ‘tee’ (T). and Greek lc mu (m) — Letters lc ‘vee’ (v). and Greek lc upsilon (y). and Nable sign () — Greek cap ‘Sigma’ (S) and Summation sign () — Union sign () and letter capital ‘you’ (U) Proofreader must take care about these similar character. Triangular (). and Greek lc tau (t) — Letters lc ‘you’ (u). Confidential --. such as: — Cap ‘bee’ (B) and Greek lc beta (b) — Greek lc epsilon (e) and Math ‘element of ’ symbol () — Letter (i) and Greek lc ‘Iota’ (i) — Letter Cap ‘kay’ (K). lc ‘kay’ (k).Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal    same Looking Character The characters which looks similar should be clearly indentified. Greek lc chi (x) and Math times sign (3) — Greek cap Delta (D). lc ‘ex (x). and Greek lc kappa (k) — Letter lc ‘el’ (l) and numeral one (1) — Letter lc ‘en’ (n) and Greek lc eta (h) — Letter cap ‘oh’ (O). Greek lc Omicron (o) and math zero (0) — Letters cap ‘pee’ (P). Greek lc nu (n) — Letter lc (w).“Publishing Services” . and Greek lc omega (v) — Letter cap ‘ex’ (X). lc (o).

.

5 font mAnAGement Overview Using and Managing Fonts in Mac OS X             How to organize your font library Which fonts are necessary to Mac OS X Where Mac OS X stores system fonts How to cleanup and organize your font library The font activation hierarchy Techniques to workaround font issues .

configure your system to minimize font problems. 4. enhance your workflow. Classic’s Fonts: Location: System Folder/Fonts .dfonts) Multiple Master (Only Mac OX X 10. Where mac os X stores the fonts Mac OS X Provides Multiple Locations for Font Storage 1.2 or later) If you use an unsupported font format. 3. such as Adobe’s InDesign Font Folder 6. Network Fonts: Location: Network/Library/Fonts 4. Mac Postscript Type 1 Open Type font (. The Font will be disabled. 2. This font management tools are an integral part of making sense of your font mess. the system either not display or print the font in applications. Main Font Collection: Location: Library/Fonts 3.otf) System or Data Fonts (.like Suitcase.Overview This chapter contains detailed recommendations and instructions that can help you work efficiently with fonts in OS X. Your Private Font Folder: Location: /Users/YourUserName/Library/Font 5. System Fonts: Location: System/Library/Fonts 2. It covers:  What font types can be used (type of fonts)  Where Mac OS X stores fonts  Which fonts are necessary to Mac OS X  How to organize your font library  The font activation hierarchy  How to cleanup and organize your font library  Techniques to workaround font issues We presume that you have made the decision to use a professional font manager . What font types can be used 1. Application’s own Font Folder.

And you need to re-boot your machine again. Beside This: When we install any application.dfont Keyboard. your system will not run.“Publishing Services” .dfont Charcoal Chicago Geneva Monaco Locations /System/Liabrary/Fonts Classic System Domain Fonts /System Folder/Fonts Required International fonts Japanese Fons Hiragino Kaku Gothic Pro W3 and W6 Hiragino Mincho Pro AquaKana Osaka and Osaka Mono LiHei Pro Apple LiGothic Medium Hei STXiHei ST Heiti Apple Gothic Regular Geeza Pro Regular and Bold /System/Liabrary/Fonts Traditional Chinese fonts /System/Liabrary/Fonts Simplified Chineses Fonts Korean Font Arabic Font /System/Liabrary/Fonts /System/Liabrary/Fonts /System/Liabrary/Fonts Remember: If you delete even a single font mentioned in this list either system or internatinal font. Required system fonts for mac os X v10. which locate in “/system folder/fonts”. Create a folder named “Adobe Application Fonts” within the Moved the System Font Folders folder. Move all the fonts that you find in /Library/Application Support/Adobe/Fonts to your new folder. Remember: If you delete any fonts mentioned in ““Classic System Domain Fonts”. So ultimaetly when you have a number of applications then you will have number of fonts also. your classic system will not work properly.dfont LastResort. Confidential --. These are the minimum list of font to run the machine.dfont Lucida Grande. 2.4 (tiger) Type OS X System Domain Fonts Fonts Geneva. To locate and manage these fonts: 1. these application place/copy fonts files in special location. You need to manage these fonts in your system. except the folder named Reqrd and the fonts stored within this folder for future reference.dfont Monaco.Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal   1 Which fonts are necessary to mac os X Below is the Chart which shows minimum and necessary fonts which need to run your system and application.

Confidential --. Press Command+Delete to remove the selected files from the System Folder. Create a folder named System Domain Fonts folder in your Moved from System Fonts Folders folder. 2. Move all fonts that you find in /Library/Fonts to your new Library Fonts folder. Move all fonts that you find in /System Folder/Fonts to your new folder. At the prompt. 6. except the following fonts: Characoal Chicago Geneva Monaco To move System Domain Fonts.dfont LastResort.dfont Lucida Grande. to manually clean up your system fonts:  1. If you aren’t sure your login level. Copy the selected fonts from the /System/Library/Fonts folder to your new System Domain Fonts folder.dfont 8. create a folder called User Fonts within the Moved from System Font Folders. If you have a Classic System Folder. create a folder called Library Fonts within the Moved from System Font Folders folder. For Local Domain Fonts. it is necessary to remove all fonts that are not absolutely essential for Mac OS X to operate.2  typesetting   rules   and   regulations manually Cleaning Up Your system font and Application font folders  In order to manually clean up your System Font and Application Font folders. Create a folder called Classic Fonts within the Moved from System Font Folder folder. 4. For User Domain Fonts. 5. enter your Mac OSX Administrator Password and click OK. these fonts must be moved. Move all fonts that you find in /Users/[name]/Library/Fonts to your new User Fonts folder.dfont Monaco.“Publishing Services” . 7. a system Folder that has an OS 9 icon at the root of your main hard disk.dfont Keyboard. 9. Select all of the fonts in the /System/Library/Fonts folder except the following essential system fonts: Geneva. check the Accounts page of the system Preferences. 3. you must be logged into Mac OS X as a user with Administrator rights.

2  InDesign Coding .6 CoDInG Overview 6.1  QuarkXpress Coding 6.

What is coding 2.   .  oding ds }kjk ge dke dk Distribution vklkuh ls dj ldrs gSa ftlls uk dsoy spcilisation gksxk vfirq dke Hkh tYnh gks tk.ksafd QuarkXpress coding budks  as a character uk ysdj as a command < ysrk gSA .   xj coding esa  dksbZ  . > and @ symbol dh coding lcls  igys  djuh pkfg. Benefits of Coding Here we are going to learn about Coding for QuarkXpress/InDesignCS2.d&. n-dash.knk advance gSA Remember during Coding 1.d lengthy process gSA 2.slk tag tks QuarkXpress templete esa  ugha  gS  rks  ml uke dk tag vius  vki cu tk.d  v djds Find Replace djuk iM+sxk tks . How can we do the coding 3.Overview In this chapter we will discuss about: 1. D. m-dash etc. Benefit of Coding 1. dks .   xj ge fcuk coding ds text dks viuh QuarkXpress templete esa Place djrs gSa rks lkjs bold.xkAa c 3 Word dk Find Replace QuarkXpress  dh rqyuk esa cgqr T.xk vkSj og normal style v dh configration ys ysrk gSA 2. italic.

The second time. Confidential --.g.1<@$p> you will have to closeup the character style by using <@#p> otherwise character style will used up to last of file. In Xpress coding we do the coding for following: Coding for Paragraph style @TX: There is no need to close paragraph style.d complecated coding gS ij blls dkQh oDr dh saving gksrh gS blfy.Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal    QuarkXpress Coding In QuarkXpress there are two type of Coding: 1.editorium.g . So we can say these tags works like character. In coming chapters we will learn about this coding.: 1 2 3 4 and other mathematical character of symbols.“Publishing Services” .g. index coding gksrh gSA .d gh ckj esa index entries extract dj ldrs gSa ftlds fy.gk¡ ge mlh dks lh[ksaxsA gkykafd . If we do convert them in QuarkXpress.com/14857.: <B>^&<B> Plain Italic Shadow All caps Superscript <P> <I> <S> <K> <+> Bold Superior Underline Small caps Subscript <B> <V> <U> Special Character Codes These tag takes place of particular word. if n-dash is coming in the file then n-dash will replace with “<\#208>”. mldk tkuuk t:jh gks tkrk gSA The Xpress Tags for indexing let you insert index markers at the text insertion point or specify ranges of text to be indexed. You can download this from “http://www. <f“FontName”>character<f$> for example 1 <f“Mathematical Pi 1”>1<f$> a <f“Mathematical Pi 1”>a<f$> Coding for Index vxj gesa author indexing mark dh gqbZ word or text file provide djrk gS rks ge mlh word file ls .dot”. @ \ < <\@> <\\> <\<> <\-> <\f> En dash Em dash Open double quotes Close double quotes Open single quote/apostrophe Close single quote/apostrophe <\#208> <\#209> <\#210> <\#211> <\#212> <\#213> Word underline <W> Strikethrough </> <-> non-breaking hyphen <\!-> En space <H> Normal hyphen For Formatting and Special Character we have the free extention for word named “ETKPlus. Coding for formatting and special Character See the below chart for Formating the text and Special Characters Character Formatting Codes Wehn these codes comes first time they’re encountered.g.g. e. We don’t require any third party extension for this. it may be a very length process so we code these character in word file. e. the format is deactivated. X-tag Coding X-Press Coding (simple Coding) It’s very easy coding. the format is activated. Coding for fonts Sometimes we found the character in word file e. Up to next style it will cover all text as TX.htm”. Xpress Coding 2. Remember: This is not case-sesative Coding for Character style <@StyleName> For Starting e. <@TN> <@$p> For Closing any character style <@TN>Table 2.

“Publishing Services” .  typesetting   rules   and   regulations Quark Xtags Coding This is the third part x-tension called. “Xtags”. “Get Text with Xtags” Procedure of X-tag coding blesa ge . Confidential --.d x-tag table define djrs gSaA  In coming chapters we will learn about this X-tag coding. you can see an additional option in File Menu. After install this extension.

This is not only save the time but also save out cost. Now you match the style as per your requirement. This procedure is benefitial only if client has used tagging and formating in word file and we have to just match them with our InDesign Templete.txt) If client has not provided tagging word file then it is much benefitial for us to follow the procedure of Coding. Now see second art. If we are importing any word document in Indisign then InDesign gives the fiacility to mapping the style there with templete. If you are working in InDesign CS 2 means version 4 then: <ASCII-MAC> <vsn:4> If you are working in InDesign CS means version 3 then: <ASCII-MAC> <vsn:3> Confidential --. InDesign Style. If you just click here you will see third art 3. 4. In third art there is a comparision between MS Word Styles vs. 2. Save that file into text file and paste these two lines on the top of text file. In InDesign coding is case-sesative. Although This is benefitial that InDesign does not create new style automatically. Here we are just importing any . When you completed your coding in word file.doc file named "unit 10 edited. InDesign automatically convert word formating into the InDesign. Just see the below arts: 1. Remember: 1.“Publishing Services” .Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal    InDesign Coding Placing Directly taged Word file (. If we give wrong tag naming then InDesign use “No Style”.doc) First we wil talk about word file. Placing Coded text file (.doc" 2. In bottom there is an option named "Customize Style Import (Style Mapping).

Coding for Indesign Cs2 footnotes Yet to create.“Publishing Services” . {gt} into proper symbol by using find replace command. we don’t use above mentioned coding... Up to next style it will cover all text as TX.. Coding for Character style <cstyle:bold> <cstyle:> For Starting Character Style For Closing Character Style <cstyle:bold>^&<cstyle:> you will have to closeup the character style by using <cstyle:> otherwise character style will used up to last of file. Confidential --. convert {lt}. <ct:Bold>^&<ct:> <ct:Italic>^&<ct:> <cp:Superscript>^&<cp:> <cp:Subscript>^&<cp:> <cu:1> ^&<cu:> <ccase:All Caps>^& <ccase:> <ccase:Small Caps>^& <ccase:> < and Special Character Codes > {lt} and {gt} <0x2002> <0x2003> <0x2013> <0x2014> En space Em space En dash Em dash After placing file into InDesign. Generally we use “standard InDesign macro” for formating text and special character code. We create seprate character style for each formating and do the character style coding in word file.  typesetting   rules   and   regulations Coding for Paragraph style <pstyle:TX> There is no need to close paragraph style. Coding for formatting and special Character See the below chart for Formating the text and Special Characters Character Formatting Codes Bold Italic Superscript Subscript Underline All caps Small caps Remember: For formating.

“Publishing Services” .Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal    Confidential --.

“Publishing Services” .0  typesetting   rules   and   regulations Confidential --.

5  Import XML 7.4  Use the Structure pane 7.3  Mapping tags and styles 7.7  Troubleshooting .7 XmL in InDesign Cs2 Overview 7.6  Export XML 7.2  Apply XML tags 7.1  XML Structure 7.1  Import XML tags 7.

proteins.A blls gesa vius  dke dks le>us esa dkQh enn feysxhA So first of all we will learn the entire XML Structure.xsl”?> <!ENTITY ext1 SYSTEM “isoamsn. bodybuilding and protective. you do not need extensive XML knowledge. 1200</para></entry> <figure> <graphic fileref=”images/junk align=”center”/> </figure> </sect1> </chapter> </book> food. The XML document has a logical structure (composed of declarations. vitamins and minerals are the main nutrients present in our food. and that might (or might not) be valid.giving. XmL structure <?xml version=”1. x &#8808. blls igys dh ge InDesing esa XML ds work procedure dks le>sa gesa XML dh basic minimum tkudkjh gksuh pkfg. according to the XML recommendation. elements.</para> <para>Food is divided into three categories: energy. and processing instructions) and a physical structure (composed of entities. We eat different kinds of food.Overview Fist of all remember that to use the XML features of InDesign CS2.</title> <entry align=”left” valign=”top”> <para>They give us heat and energy to work and play.</para> <sect1> <title>Energy-giving foods. or document entity). <emphasis role=”bold”> Carbohydrates</emphasis> and are energy. They also keep our skin and hair healthy.jpg” format=”JPG” Root Child Element XmL Document A data object that is well-formed. starting with the root. . character references.giving nutrients.ent”> Element <book> <chapter> <title id=”chapter5”>5</title> <subtitle>Food</subtitle> <para>We need food to stay healthy and grow strong. comments. They contain useful substances called nutrients.dtd”> <?xml-stylesheet type=”text/xsl” href=”food.0” encoding=”UTF-8”?> <!DOCTYPE book SYSTEM “docdtd. Carbohydrates. fats.

g.“Publishing Services” . The DTD is declared within the document type declaration production of the XML file. For a list of encoding types go to the XML Specification. XML documents start with an XML version declaration (XML declaration) which specifies the version of XML being used.Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal    XmL Version Declarations  dkSu lk version use fd. The XML declaration is a processing instruction that notifies the processing agent that the following document has been marked up as an XML document. The DTD for a document consists of both subsets taken together.0”? encoding=”UTF-8”?> dtd (Document type Definition) bles file es use gksu okys lkjs tags well formed and systematically define fd. In other words it is the markup declarations that describe a grammar for a class of documents. encoding Declarations Encoding Declarations inform the processor what kind of code the document uses (e.slk tag use fd. <?xml version=”1.s gksr gSA vxj XML file es dksb .k tkrk gS tks  a a s s a a Z dtd es define ugha gS rks XML verify/parse ugha gks ikrh gSA a dtd in XML is a grammar that describes what tags and attributes are valid in an XML document that refers to the DTD. in an internal subset directly within the XML file.k gqvk gS It is the information for the application. UFT8.k tk jgk gSA ftlls . which is the same character Set as ASCII). XML parsers may support a larger set. The markup declarations can be in an external subset (a special kind of external entity).g irk pyrk gS fd veqd document XML coded fd.dtd”> XsL (extensible stylesheet Language) ftl izdkj ge dksbZ style sheet cukrs gSa vkSj according to the job mldh configration set djrs gSa mlh rjg XSL XML coding document dk  style set djrh gSA . All XML parsers must support 8-bit and 16-bit Unicode encoding corresponding to ASCII.kfu ml file dks call fd. It will look something like the following: <?xml version=”1. However. and in what context the tags and attributes are valid.k tkrk gSA <!DOCTYPE book SYSTEM “docdtd.” Confidential --.0”?> The version declaration can also contain other information such as an encoding declaration or standalone declarations. or both.kfu nwljs ’kCnksa esa XSL XML dh style sheet gSA “XSL is a way of applying transformations and formatting to XML documents. It is suggested by the W3C specification. XmL dtd Declaration dtd file dk uke fy[kk tkrk gS .

”> “&#8808.”> <xsl:apply-templates/></body> </html> </xsl:template> <xsl:template match=”book/chapter/title”> XmL entity The function of an XML entity is similar to that of a macro definition. not equals --> <!--U02269 /gneqq N: greater.g.”> “&#8775.org/1999/XSL/Transform” xmlns: fo=”http://www.xsl <?xml version=”1. not double equals --> <!--U022E6 /lnsim N: less. an entity declaration provides the ability to have constants or replacement strings.“Publishing Services” . not approximate --> <!--U02268 /lneq N: less.”> “&#8777. An XML parser reading this document will look for an external entity e. In XML.”> “&#8809.s line ml XML document ds fy. 2.”> “&#8934. which can be internal or external. but may be a string or even a database record.”> “&#10889.w3.w3. There are three things that might loosely be called entities in XML: 1. not equals --> <!--U02268 /lneqq N: less. Internal entities function as typing shortcuts or macros. font:normal 1em Myriad Roman. XSL file dks call/read djrh gSA  a a food. are only available within the internal and external subsets (the DTD). not dbl equals --> <!--U022E7 /gnsim N: greater. not similar --> <!--U02A89 /lnapprox N: less.”> <!--U02269 /gneq N: greater. 3. which are expanded by a pre-processor.0” encoding=”UTF-8”?> <xsl:stylesheet version=”1. Entity in XML is a virtual storage unit. External entities allow you to incorporate content from other files.”> “&#8808. not similar --> <!--U02249 /napprox N: not approximate --> <!--U02247 /ncong N: not congruent with --> Explanation Confidential --.”> “&#8935.0” xmlns:xsl=”http://www.named “isoamsn. It is often a separate file. An entity declaration maps some token to a replacement string. Code for Entity isoamsn.ent” and report an error if it doesn’t find it.  typesetting   rules   and   regulations XsL Declaration XML coding document es top es vkus okyh .org/1999/XSL/Format”> <xsl:template match=”/”> <xsl:apply-templates/> </xsl:template> <xsl:template match=”*”> <xsl:apply-templates/> </xsl:template> <html> <body style=”margin:3% 17% 3% 17%. If it does find a file named that looks like this. Parameter entities.ent <!ENTITY gne <!ENTITY gnE <!ENTITY gnsim <!ENTITY lnap <!ENTITY lne <!ENTITY lnE <!ENTITY lnsim <!ENTITY nap <!ENTITY ncong “&#8809. Later the token can be prefixed with the & character and the replacement string is put in its place.

ksafd <para> tks fd  <entry> ds vUnj vk jgk gS blfy. Often attributes are used to pass information about the element and hence can be said to provide metadata for the element. bl coding esa tgk¡ <sec1> parent element gS mldk child element <title>. Content may be made up of markup characters and character data. tags Tags are text structures that mark the beginning and end of elements within the XML document. <sect1> <title>Energy-giving foods. Content Content is all data between the start tag and end tag of an element. Thus we see that any code can be child element or parent element both. <entry> gSA ijUrq D.“Publishing Services” . <emphasis role=”bold”>Carbohydrates</emphasis> and are energy. x &#8808. A well-formed XML document does not necessarily include a DTD. <para> <entry> dk child element dgyk. If it containing other tag then those tags will be treated it’s child element. They also keep our skin and hair healthy. Attribute in XML is a name=”value” pair that can be placed in the start tag of an element. An attributes is a value indicator (=) and the attribute value is specified within the tag (i. It is an additional information about a piece of data (element). Valid An XML document is valid if it conforms to the vocabulary specified in a DTD or schema. Well formed A well-formed XML document follows all the rules of the XML specification. The element containing other elements is known as the parent element.Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal    Root element Every XML document has one element that contains all other elements of the document. Confidential --. <H3 align=”center”>). But it is not necessarily valid according to an associated document type declaration. For XML.k ds fy.giving nutrients.</title> <entry align=”left” valign=”top”> <para>They give us heat and energy to work and play. Generally Entity file contains unicode characters. all values must be quoted with single or double quotes. In other words. an XML document with an associated document type declaration that follows all the rules of that declaration is valid. The root element is also called the document element. Child element Child element is an element contained within another element. Attribute An attribute is a property of an element. 1200</para> </entry> mnkgj. Tags are markup characters.e.sxk vkSj <entry> parent element. Unicode is a standard for representing characters from languages around the world.

.g iwjh rjg ls text base gksrk gS dksbZ Hkh character blesa manually set ugha fd. body-building and protective.. DTD File ls ml XML coded file dks well formed checked fd..  Simple Formatting e.s Internal Entity .</para> a.k tkrk  ..k rjhds  ls  coding djrs  gSa  rks  vki D.s s 2..k gS rks mls InDesing esa Bhd yxk ysaxsA fcYdqy lghA . XSL File ds tfj.k  tkrkA vkSj dksbZ Hkh client ckj ckj . fd  a a XML es mUgha tagging dks use djuk pkfg..jpg” format=”JPG” align=”center”/> .kfu job to job style naming change gksrh gSA vc ge FkksM+k lk process change djrs gSa vkSj .k tkrk gSA dtd file esa gh lkjh tagging define dh xbZ gksrh gSA 3..xhA Confidential --. left.gh coding dk process Hkh gksrk gS tgka coding person according to the templete styling  djds nsrk gS vkSj tc ge coded file dks templete esa place fd.ku nsus  okyh gksrh gS fd vki bl XML Coded File dks fdl izdkj ls viuh InDesign Templete esa Place djk.g..</emphasis>: for bold <graphic fileref=”images/junk food.kfu vc vkids ikl XML Coded File vk pqdh gSA Now you will have to import the text into your XML file.k tkrk gS rks vius vki gh lkjs style yx tkrs gSa gesa flQZ setting djuh gksrh gS tSls flotting element like tables and figure lgh rjhds ls set djuh gksrh gSaA .gk¡  ckr /.gk¡ .s lkjs special character dh coding dh tkrh gSA . dh coding djrs gSa fQj ml file dks InDesign esa place dj ysrs gSaA vxj dksbZ style coding esa xyr  yx x.ksafd .s gSa mlus rks cl  Standardisation XML Coding dh vkSj File vkidks idMk+ nsrk gSA .ku nsu okyh gS fd close dsoy main tag dks gh fd. formating style.kfu styling dh tkrh gSA 4.kfu vc rd ge le>s fd% XML Coding dks  best input text source file ekuk tkrk gS  D.> ls start vkSj </. ctr..d gh source data dks Bhd ugha djuk pkgrkA og mlh data dk multi-purpose use djuk pkgrk gSA 1. ds fy.ku nsuh okyh gS fd normal coding person word file esa ogh styles dh coding djrk gS tks mls nh tkrh gSA . italic.s ckr ?.giving.k tkrk gSA dHkh Hkh Attributes dsk close ugha fd.s mldh designing/fromating dh tkrh gSA . tks DTD File es define dj j[ks gksA ojuk og XML File Varify/Parse ugha gks ikrh  a a a gSA vFkkZr mlesa error jg tkrh gSA b.d coding person vkidks vkidh templete ds fglkc ls ugha cfYd vius Fix International Standard ds fglkc ls coding djds nsrk gSA mls ugha irk vkius viuh templete esa dkSu&dkSu ls style cuk.s dgrs gSa fd . and Callout.gk¡ .sxsA step 1:  Open the templete after opening the fonts tc vki templete open djds structure pane open djrs gks rks ogk¡ default “Root” element display gks jgk gksrk gSA vc vkidks fuEufyf[kr  step ysus gksaxsA step 2:  “Load DTD. ij .” tSls gh vki job related dtd import djksxs “Root” ds mij dtd display gks tk.“Publishing Services” .ksafd XML coded data different platform .....ku j[kuk pkfg. XML es tks tagging dh tkrh gS] og tagging DTD file es well formed and serial wise define gksrh gSA /.k different packages/ software esa ckj&ckj change ugha gksrk gSA D.k djrs  gks\ vkidk tckc gksxk paragraph style. etc. Entity ds tfj. character style.: bold. XML File es data dh coding/tagging dh tkrh gSA tks <.s ckr /. </graphic> : for calling graph .kfu dqy feykdj ftruk Material t:jh Fkk oks lkjk gekjs ikl vk pqdk gS vkSj ge mlds ckjs at least basic tkudkjh rks ys gh pqds gSa ftruh t:jh Fkh rks  vc ge vc ge le>saxs fd InDesign CS2 fdl izdkj XML dks support djrk gSA Getting started XmL with InDesign Cs2 eku yhft. Attributes dh coding djuh gksrh gSA tSls%    <emphasis role=”bold”>..k External Entity (Seprated File) nksauks  gh :i esa gks ldrs gSaA vc gekjs ikl tks material gS  from XmL Person XML Coded File DTD File XSL File Entity File Fonts from setup Person Templete Sample File .  typesetting   rules   and   regulations .> ls close gksrh gSA tSl% a s   <para>Food is divided into three categories: energy. vki lk/kkj. special character fonts.

k tk ldrk gSA 1.s gSa mlus rks cl Standardisation XML Coding dh vkSj File vkidks idMk+ nsrk gSA vc vki file dks place dj pqds gks yfdu vc vkidks irk pyrk gS fd cgqr ls tag name  vkidh templete esa cuk.k tk  ldrk gSA Now you can either manually layout XML content.. vkidks  “Import XML.k rks vki gj paragraph ij ..s x.1 Manual Importing the XML Coded File. dk option fn[kkbZ  nsxkkA mlls  Coded file dks  import fd.s mapping gksrh D. if the type of content varies. This approach works well if you don’t know the precise sequence of elements in the imported XML file. View → Structure → Show Structure: Then side esa  tks  Structure Pannel  vk.. or automate its layout by importing it into a document that contains placeholder frames.k gS mlds Right side esa tks symbol ( ) fn[k jgk gS ml ij click dhft.k x. XML in InDesign Structure Pane XML Placed in Layout manual Layout The most common method for importing XML into InDesign is to drag the unplaced content from the Structure pane into frames in your document. If you’ve created placeholder frames (beofre importing the XML Coded File).d djds mannually lgh style yxk.Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal    step 3:  “Import XML.k Fkk fd XML Coding person vkidks  vkidh templete ds  fglkc ls  ugha  cfYd vius  Fix International Standard ds fglkc ls coding djds nsrk gSA mls ugha irk vkius viuh templete esa dkSu&dkSu ls style cuk.xh vkSj Root ds vUnj lkjs element display  gks tk. InDesign merges the content into the placeholder frames automatically  n tSlk fd vkidks  igys  crk. When you import an XML file.d&.saxsA step 4:  Import the XML File into the layout Importing XmL file igyh  ckr  rks  .k mapping dj ysaA vc loky  mBrk gS . Figure 8.sa . Automatic Layout If you know the order of the elements in the XML file you plan to import. InDesign initially places it into the Structure Pane. you can create placeholder frames for the XML content.k  Coded File  dh  Hkk¡rh  (File → Place) get ugha djkbZ tkrhA bls nks rjhdksa ls Place fd.s style ls match ugha djrsA  vkids ikl vc nks rjhds gSa fd .s  fd  XML Coded File  lk/kkj. When you import the XML file.“Publishing Services” . InDesign can also import the content into the frames for you. File → Import XML: Simply Import the XML File 2.k gSA Confidential --..” Coded File XML Coded File import djrs gh structure pane esa XML style sheet top ij add gks tk. or if you get content from multiple sources.

superscript .g tku ikvksx fd coding person us gjsd element  ds fy. 1200</para></entry> </root> tables Attributes blh izdkj Tables ds  fy.k dksb vkSj type dh gks lcds fy. in points. respectively.0” encoding=”UTF-8” ?> <!DOCTYPE Recipe SYSTEM “food. you use the aid:pstyle and aid:cstyle attributes to specify paragraph and character styles.0” encoding=”UTF-8” ?> <!DOCTYPE Recipe SYSTEM “food.adobe. </emphasis> . The default is 1. If present. The following example shows these attributes: Recieved XML Coded File <?xml version=”1. They also keep our skin and hair healthy.s gS fd vki /. A value of “cell” indicates a cell element.A Paragraph and Character style Attributes tSlk fd vkidks vHkh rd irk yxk fd vki paragraph styles dks mapping ds )kjk match djk ldrs gSA ijUrq vki typefaces and typestyles  a as a Z dks dSl map djk.d gh rjhds ls  s coding dh tkrh gSA tSl% <emphasis role=”bold”> .s gS mudh list gS vkSj Style es tks  a setup person us style cuk.giving nutrients.“Publishing Services” . Specifies how many RoWs the CURRent CeLL sPAns..k <emphasis role=”italic”> .. Confidential --.sx\ XML Coding es gjsd typefaces fQj pkgs oks bold. Specifies the number of RoWs in the table. </emphasis> s vc tc vki viuh Indesign File es XML File Import djds mapping djus yxrs gks rks vkidks gj typeface/typestyle ds fy. x &#8808.d ckj es gh lkjh  a a styling viuh t:jr ds vuqlkj change dj ldrs gSA vkSj next file ds fy.. 1200</para></entry> </root> Alteration in XML Coded File <?xml version=”1.0/”> <para aid:pstyle=”tx”>They give us heat and energy to work and play. Specifies the number of CoLUmns in the table. the theader attribute indicates that the current cell is part of a tABLe HeADeR row. Used only in the Table element.com/AdobeInDesign/4.oa Indesign Sample dks study  djuk gksxk mlh dh enn ls vki . Specifies the WIDtH.gk¡ Tag a a a es XML coding person us word file es tks tag use fd. Hkh XML File es  vkidks  additional table style coding djuh gksrh gSA rkfd tc vki xml file layout es  drag djs  vkidks  cuh cukbZ  a a a table fey ldsA Attribute table trows tcols theader crows ccols ccolwidth tfooter Value table cell Numeric Numeric Empty Numeric Numeric Numeric Empty Description Specifies a table-type element.giving nutrients. XML File es vkidks additional character style coding djuh gksrh gSA oks dSl% For text formatting. They also keep our skin and hair healthy. vkidks viuh XML Coded File ..dtd”> <root xmlns:aid=”http://ns. .s gS mudh list gSA vc vkidks djuk . italic. Specifies how many CoLUmns the CURRent CeLL sPAns. <emphasis role=”bold”>Carbohydrates</emphasis> and are energy. If present. <emphasis aid:cstyle=”bold”>Carbohydrates</ emphasis> and are energy. the tfooter attribute indicates that the current cell is part of a tABLe footeR row.dtd”> <root> <para>They give us heat and energy to work and play.  typesetting   rules   and   regulations What is mapping “Mapping is a process in which you can replace the coded file’s tag into InDesing style”.  s s dkSu&dkSu lk tag use fd. A value of “table” indicates the container tABLe element.k djksx\  s a s blds fy. The default is 1. See the below image: (Window → Tag → Map Tag to Styles) a a a bl image es left side es “Tag” vkSj right side  es “Style” dh list ns j[kh gSA .r% Mapping XML file dks templete ds vUnj drag djus ls igys gh djuh pkfg. Hkh blh mapping setting dks save djds j[k ldrs gSA a Mapping djus ds fy. Used only in the Table element. x &#8808.k gSA rHkh vki mls viuh templete ds fglkc ls map djk ikvksxA  lkekU.d gh  a tag “emphasis” feyrk gSA vc vki D.kuiwod Tag a Z vs Style dks Bhd ls map djk ysA bl rjg mapping dh enn ls vki . of the CURRent CeLL. flQZ .

it can display the first words of any text within an element. indicates no column spanning. The Structure Pane lets you view. to place imported XML content into the layout. InDesign displays the element tag and icons that represent dierent types of content. Element (placed in layout) C. edit. Regular table cells do not have an attribute to indicate what type they are. The default. Footing cells use a similar aid:tfooter attribute. as well as export documents to XML. called a text snippet. Text snippet . comments. The empty aid:theader attribute indicates a heading cell. attributes.adobe. and manage your XML elements. you can drag elements from the Structure pane directly to a page. 2. You use the Structure pane in many ways when working with XML. To help you identify the elements.0/” aid:table=”table” aid:trows=”6” aid:tcols=”4”> <Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:theader=”” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1”>Table header 1</Cell> <Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:theader=”” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1”>Table header 2</Cell> <Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:theader=”” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”130”>Table header 3</Cell> <Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:theader=”” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”130”>Table header 4</Cell> <Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid: ccolwidth=”130”>A</Cell> <Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”59”>B</Cell> <Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”130”>C</Cell> <Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”130”>D</Cell> <Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”2”>E straddles two columns</Cell> <Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”130”>F</Cell> <Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”130”>G</Cell> <Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”130”>H</Cell> <Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”59”>I</Cell> <Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”2” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”130”>J straddles two rows</Cell> <Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”130”>K</Cell> <Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”130”>L</Cell> <Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”59”>M</Cell> <Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”130”>N</Cell> <Cell aid:table=”cell” aid:tfooter=”” aid:crows=”1” aid:ccols=”1” aid:ccolwidth=”130”>Table footer</Cell> </Table> The aid:trows and aid:tcols attributes specify the number of rows and columns in the table. table Header 1 A H L Table footer table Header 2 B I M table Header 3 C F J straddles two rows table Header 4 D G K N E straddles two columns The XML code for the table is shown below: <Table xmlns:aid=”http://ns. Triangles to expand or collapse elements B. Because the hierarchy and order of elements is so important in XML files. The aid:ccols attribute indicates that the current cell spans the specified number of columns. such as text or graphics.Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal    Here is an example of table. The Structure pane displays all the elements within the document and their hierarchy. When you apply tags to content. you use the Structure pane to adjust the hierarchy of the elements. The aid:crows attribute indicates row spanning.com/AdobeInDesign/4. Element (not placed in layout) D. 3. You can add elements. and processing instructions.“Publishing Services” A BC D A. Confidential --. 1. For example: 1. you will use the Structure pane and Tags palette frequently when working with XML content. In addition. Understand/Learn the other terms of InDesign XmL InDesign lets you import and layout XML content.

Attributes are meaningful in XML but do not appear in the InDesign document itself. Represents a table. Includes comments that appear in the XML file. but cannotbe moved or delet ed. Confidential --. Tells InDesign which DTD file to use when validating the XML file.0  typesetting   rules   and   regulations The Tags Palette lists tags for each element in a document. Represents XML-tagged text within aframe. At a glance. which can be renamed. The following icons appear in the Structure pane: Icon name structural element Use Each document includes only one root element. add. the Structure pane shows which elements have been placed on the page and which have not (a blue diamond on an element icon indicates that the element is attached to a page item). such as keywords or location of a linked image (HREF attribute). Unplaced text element not yet associatedwitha page item in the document layout. Represents a tagged frame that includes a placed image. Understand the structuring Pane The Structure pane displays a hierarchical tree of tagged page items and imported XML content. and rename tags. Structure Pane Icons with It’s Name and Functions When a tagged page item is selected in the document layout. delete.“Publishing Services” story element text element Graphic element Unplaced text element Unplaced Graphic element table element Header Cell element Body Cell element footer Cell element empty element Attribute Comment Processing Instruction Doctype element . but not the InDesign document. Items that appear in the Structure pane are called elements. export. You select and move elements in the Structure pane to define the sequence and hierarchy of page items in the exported XML file. Represents tagged stories (one or more linked frames). Each graphic element includes an “href ” attribute that defines the path or URL to the linked file. Includesmetadata. Represents a cell in the header row of a table. You can import. Represents a cell within the body of a table. the corresponding item is underlined in the Structure pane.Other structural elements are used to organize the elements listed below. Includes an instruction that triggers anaction in applications that can read processing instructions. You can also use it to tag frames before importing XML into them. Unplaced graphic element not yet associated with a page item in the document layout. Represents a cell in the footer row of a table. You use the Tags palette to apply element tags to content that you plan to export to XML. An empty frame is associated with this element.

drag it to a new location within the structure tree. click the triangle next to the element you want to expand or collapse. The root element must remain at the top of the structure. the element and contents are cut to the clipboard. In addition.“Publishing Services” . comments. To resize the Structure pane. A line appears when you drag to indicate where you are inserting the element. or to close the Structure pane if it’s open. You cannot move or delete the root element or the DOCTYPE element. choose Show Text Snippets or Hide Text Snippets from the Structure pane menu. and then release the mouse button. • Note: When you cut an element. In the Structure pane. or processing instructions can appear above the root element. Changing the hierarchy affects the structure of exported XML files. and then choose Edit → Copy or Edit → Cut. you can do the following: • • • To move an element. The width of the line marks the level within the hierarchy. To copy or cut an element. select the element or elements in the Structure pane. choose View → Structure → Show Tag Markers. If you move a text element to make it the child of an element elsewhere in the structure. Showing or hiding text snippets sets the default for any new document you create. the entire tag name appears. you cannot drag table cell elements or drop elements into a table element. click the splitter button at the bottom of the document window. Confidential --. drag it just above another parent element and move to the left slightly until the line indicating its placement spans the width of the parent element. choose View → Structure → Show Structure. Viewing XmL tags To help you manage XML tags in an InDesign file.Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal   1 To Use The Structure Pane • • • • • • To view the Structure pane. To make an element a child of another element. drag the splitter button (at the bottom of the document window) left or right. In the main document window. and choose Edit → Paste. tags appear as colored brackets. hold down Command Key while clicking the triangle next to the element. In the Story Editor. To show or hide text snippets. Only the DTD(appearing as aDOCTYPE element). either position it over the parent element to highlight it or place it amongst the parent’s other child elements. To display XML tags. To Rearrange Elements You can rearrange the order of elements in the Structure pane. To open the Structure pane to the last saved width. To expand or contract an element as well as all elements contained within it. To move an element out a level in the hierarchy. the text in the layout also moves. but the frame remains intact. Select the element directly above where you want to insert the element. To expand or collapse an element. you can set up the file to show tags.

choose View → Structure → Show Tag Markers. Error or invalidating condition C. index entries. To minimize the risk of accidentally deleting a tag marker. • To display color brackets around tagged text. You can fix errors one at a time or view all errors at once in a separate window. to Validate XmL structure When you validate the XML in a document. • To hide the color-coding of tagged frames. InDesign compares the structure. Error count E. Loaded DTD B. markers surround tagged text (right). and attributes against the DTD you loaded. choose View → Structure → Show Tagged Frames. markers for returns. • To hide color brackets around tagged text. and hyperlinks will appear. View all errors at once in a separate window A B C D E F Confidential --. Validate button F. • To display tagged frames in color. Description of error with suggested fix D. Note: If you choose Type → Show Hidden Characters. The tag color determines the color of the frame or bracket. Elements appear in the Structure pane (left). edit tagged text in Story Editor.“Publishing Services” . where tag markers are more visible. choose View → Structure → Hide Tagged Frames. element tag names. and suggest the ways to fix the XML to match the DTD requirements.2  typesetting   rules   and   regulations to show or Hide tagged frames or tag markers You can display tagged frames in color or display colored brackets around tagged text. A. InDesign alerts you if the XML deviates from the DTD. choose View → Structure → Hide Tag Markers.

1  X-Table’s Seven Styles of Tables 8.2  Advance Feature 8.3  Tips on Technique .8 YoRk’s X-tABLe Overview About Table 8.

• • . Text Line A patch of type set inside the table body which is neither in any one column nor a straddle head. in 12 point type. it would be a space five points wide. we use the word gutter to mean the white space between two adjacent columns. readable. They usually run from the lefthand edge of one column to the right-hand edge of another. • Change the positioning in the column of any data in the table—operations are allowed on any “cell. • Set straddle heads and control how they are positioned over the columns they straddle. Elements of Tables • • • • • • • • • Rows Horizontal arrangements of characters in straight lines. We will generally use the terms row and line interchangeably. will be in the same position with respect to the left-hand edge of the column for all lines in that column. and so on. An en space is a space with a width equal to onehalf the current point size. Columns are separated from one another by white space or by white space and vertical rules. In 10 point type. and understandable. Since XTable is a QuarkXTension.. • Automatically align horizontal paragraph rules with type. if present in the column when XTable typesets the table. What Is a Table? A table is a collection of information logically organized in rows and columns usually according to content.Overview YORK’s XTable is a professional table composition enhancement available for QuarkXPress.” line. Gutter This term is usually used to refer to the white space between two facing pages in a book. you will use standard dialogs and menus to specify the table’s parameters. you can take advantage of all the functionality available in QuarkXPress when you use it to set type that is destined to be made into a table. or column. Inside Gutter Any gutter that falls after the first column and before the last column. you can make this information more attractive. When you are ready to build a table. In table composition. The term evolved from quadrat which referred to a piece of lead one en or more in width. separate from the table title or main head. Quadding space is placed on either side of a centered line. or the left-hand end of a flush right line. Straddle Rule A rule that spans more than one column in the table. Column Area containing type that runs vertically on the page. however. Alignment Point A character in a column which. Head Word or words at the top of the column which categorize the data in the column. YORK’s XTable allows you to format your information in any one of seven basic styles. XTable will figure tab stops. Outside Gutter There are exactly two per table—the one that falls before the first column and the one that comes after the last column. There are variations on most of these styles that give you complete control over your table’s appearance. What Can I Do with XTable? XTable contains a wealth of practical features that enable you to: • Control column and gutter widths. indentions and so on to compose the table to your specifications. Using composition software. Quadding The procedure of “setting white space” to fill out the end of a typeset line. and align type on special points within each of the columns. the right-hand end of a flush left line. Straddle Head A head that is placed over more than one of the columns in the table. • Specify text alignment in columns. a space six points wide.

“Publishing Services” . That is because after determining the column and gutter widths. the effect is the same as setting a Style B table with fixed inside gutters and a paragraph indent applied to the range of text that makes up the table. Style B table is typeset to fill the measure. The type in the first column will be flush left and the widest item in the last column will be flush right. such as using XTable’s Add Remainder command. you specify the widths of the inside gutters. This should speed your work and make using the program more convenient. Using it. Conversely. When you subsequently draw vertical rules that are flush left and right on the measure. There are even more ways to manipulate a Style B table. and the program will compute the correct width for the inside gutters to set the table to your specification. the type in the first column will come out flush left. We have incorporated these classes into the way XTable works and called them styles (not style sheets) in order to automate the process of specifying the format for tables. if you ask XTable for fixed inside gutters each 3 picas wide. you can specify gutter widths for the outside gutters. Alternately. Using them this way tends to give greater visual emphasis to the table. and each inside gutter will be 3 picas wide. there isn’t much for the program to do other than determine where to set the tab stops so that you will get gutters the specified width and warn you of an overset error should one occur.Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal    Xtable’s seven styles of tables At YORK. the white space around those rules will be equal to the white space around the rules in the table’s inside gutters. In fact. If you instruct XTable to set a Style B table to a width of 30 picas with fixed outside gutters of 3 picas.ksafd blls uk dsoy dkWye ds chp dk Lisl  equal gksrk gS cfYd igys vkSj vkf[kjh dkWye ds text ds nksuksa rjQ equal space gksus ls os Hkh ckdh dkWye dh rjgk gh set gksrk gSA style B This is the style you will probably use most. we have found that practically any table will fall into one of seven distinct classes. for the inside gutters. But Style B offers much more. Typically. style A This is the style most commonly used to set tables that will have vertical rules. XTable puts a space equal to one-half the inside gutter width in front of the first column and after the last column. with the rest of the type aligning on that widest item. the program will compute the correct gutter size for the gutters inside the table to force the table to set to 30 picas. but these advanced features are thoroughly explained later in this chapter. and XTable will compute left and right paragraph indents and tab stops to center the entire table and set any paragraph rules flush left and right on the type. . Finally. Confidential --. if you specify amounts for both inside and outside gutters. or both.kfu ftu tables esa vertical rule Mkyuk gksrk gS ogk¡ ge Xtable ds Style A dk use djrs gSaA D. style C You will want to use this style when you need to center a table in a specified measure. since it affords you the greatest flexibility and control over composition issues such as gutter and column widths. Style C tables are frequently used in-line in text columns. Style B is the only style that allows fixed gutters both inside and outside the body of the table. you can ask XTable to set your Style C table with fixed outside gutters. In this case.

we show this feature for the first time. it allows you to employ some of XTable’s advanced features. XTable would have adjusted the amounts added to the “flexible” gutters. We then used the Add Remainder command to add a maximum of 12 points to the gutter following the first column and 12 points to the gutter preceding the last column. We instructed the program to set the inside gutters to 18 points. XTable sets all columns to the width of the widest one. Since the table did not overset when the maximum was added to the gutters we specified as Add Remainder gutters.A vc ge X-table ds ckdh ds options dks le>saxsA Confidential --. Had the table reached its maximum width of 27 picas while the program was spreading the gutters after columns one and four. The reason is that the program padded the first and last columns with blank space to make their widths equal to the width of the widest (the second) column. except you can use fixed inside gutters. Our table’s gutter widths are 30–18–18–30 points. The entire table is set flush on one of the margins. Gutter widths are computed by the program. we set the same table as a Style B (automatic gutters) table right below the first table and invite you to compare the two tables’ appearance. user-specified gutter widths are not permitted. XTable puts in the maximum for each. such as Add Remainder. To differentiate Style G from similar styles. vHkh rd geus X-Table ds lkrks styles dks le>k fd mudks fdl  fdl condition esa dgk¡&dgk¡ use djuk pkfg. style G When you use this style. As XTable determines the inside gutter space.“Publishing Services” .  typesetting   rules   and   regulations styles D and e The main feature of both these styles is the automatic computation of gutter space. You cannot specify gutter widths when using these styles. it leaves room for a space equal to one-half that space and puts that space at the other margin. In that sense. it is rather like a Style D table. style f This style is normally set flush right. In the example that follows. Note that the type in the last column is not flush right on the measure. Since this style uses fixed gutters. The following example helps to make this clear. This sets off the three columns in the center.

Next.s nksuksa option on gks tkrs gSa vc vki viuh t:jr ds vuqlkj gutter fix dj ldrs gSaA D. then you need to just give here “15p”. Means gutter between columns will be “in first gutter after first column 5 p12 + (1p to p6): . You can specify every gutter M in a table as a flexible gutter. Now we come to the Ist option Initial Typesetting.. In order for any of the items on the Tables menu to be active. you will see the X-Tables menu item appear on the main menu bar. B.3:1p.p6.sxkA F. Whether you need to set columns left.” Maximum Add is the largest amount of space the program should add to this gutter. You can specify the alignment of column by this option.kfu ftruh box dh width gksrh gS . and inimum Add is the smallest acceptable amount of space to add to this particular gutter. Right or centre.s mlds vuqlkj space dks lkjs columns esa adjust dj nsrk gSA ijUrq vxj Fixed ij click djrs gSa rks .s default :i ls ges'kk gh current box jgrk gSA . Otherwise. you must have a document open and the Content tool must be selected. E.s mlds vuqlkj space adjust djrk gSA ijUrq vxj vki blesa dksbZ value nsuk pkgsa rks ns ldrs gSaA tSls your text width is 30 pica and you need to set table within 15 pica maximum. XTable stops and displays the table for you. it adds to those amounts the minimum value specified for each Add Remainder gutter. you must have a range of text selected as well. For example: Assume you have select a table Fixed Insie Gutter 5 p12 Add Reminder 5 1:1p. This ensures that each gutter’s width is increased equally so that the overall “balance” of white space is preserved. A C D E B F A. the semicolon separates specifications for each gutter.Minimum Add. Gutter: Add Reminder: You can specify which gutters are “Add Remainder” and the how much amounts of space to be added.“Publishing Services” .. Default Date Positioning: It fix the alignment of columns. Style: We have already understood the role of style in X-table.Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal    Building a Basic table When you start QuarkXPress with YORK’s XTable installed correctly. Gutter: Automatic or Fixed: vxj vki automatic setlect djrs gSa rks inside and Outside Gutter off jgrs gSaA . In the command string.2:0. If the table has reached its maximum width or is wider than the specified measure.kfu ftruh box dh width gksrh gS .0. Add Remainder: Syntax is Gutter:Maximum Add. C. Target Width: .p0. Confidential --. whichever happens first.kfu vxj space available gqvk rks p24 ugha gqvk rks de ls de p12 1 p6 5 p18 vkSj vxj bruk space Hkh ugha feyk rks og error message ns nsxkA” blh izdkj nwljs vkSj rhljs gutter dk space Hkh adjust gks tk. For the Initial Typesetting… item to be enabled. How Does Add Reminder Work? When XTable figures the gutters in a table. where Gutter stands for “the gutter following column number. Table will not occupy space more than 15p in any condition. the program spreads each flexible gutter by the same amount until each one reaches its maximum value or the table reaches its maximum width. it begins by setting each gutter to the amount of space specified for fixed inside gutters.

  typesetting   rules   and   regulations set strddle Head dlfdfdfkj specify Alignment Point dlfdfdfkj Line and Column Quadding dlfdfdfkj table Vertical Rules dlfdfdfkj troubleshooting Confidential --.“Publishing Services” .

12 Force Level 9.9 Pi Character Procedure Integral Procedure Summation Procedure Radical Procedure Stack Limits Macro Slector Matrix Division/Fractions Case Fractions 9.3 9.11 Styles 9.4 9.7 9.9 Powermath/XPress math Overview 9.5 9.1 9.6 9.13 Stacking .8 9.2 9.10 Math Rules 9.

edit text or print a document containing PowerMath.k tkrk gSA vxj fdlh project esa equations cgqr de gSa rks mudks illustrator esa cuk ysuk vPNk gksrk gS D. The reason is: The PowerMath XT cannot be removed from a file once attached (even accidentally). PowerMath supersets cannot be renamed once used to create equations. fd. or always marks a particular change.000 to 100. you are in demo mode. and the XTension will always need to be activated to open the file. but you will not be able to save your work in PowerMath. If a proofreader marks many equations to be modified. You can practice inputting equations in demo mode. which is a job-specific preferences file.A PowerMath Superset and Version Each PowerMath project needs its own Superset file. If a job uses PowerMath.d Costly Xtension gSA dHkh Hkh viuh ethZ ls .Overview PowerMath is a Quark XTension used for creating the math equations. as long as you are not modifying the equations.s client crkrk gS vFkok project launch ds le. Once these have been approved. gh r.k ugha . This means a book may pick up a superset named with a previous edition’s job code.d Dongle/Hardware key gksrh gSA ftls “Eve3 Key” ds uke ls tkuk tkrk gSA fcuk blds powermath demo mode esa run djrk gSA Job esa powermath use djuk gS . The version of PowerMath to use must be listed in the Readme file in the same folder for knowledge of client. the Superset must be placed in Job Setup folder. Only enable it while you are actively using PowerMath in a project. This is a problem if the job was not intended to use PowerMath.ksafd powermath . Demo Mode If the background of your equation editing window displays yellow on screen. Samples Take Precedence Every PowerMath job includes a sample of typical math equations for client approval. Opening PowerMath Files A file containing PowerMath equations cannot be opened without first loading the XTension. The math sample is included in the spec package for easy reference. stop and investigate before doing a lot of manual changes that cannot easily be updated. Any version of PowerMath can be enabled to allow you to simply open and view. PowerMath Supersets should updated by only job lead. bldk viuh .k lqfo/kkuqlkj fcuk client permission ds powermath use ugh djuk pkfg. Increase the Minimum Size to well over the 9000 K default.000K while working in PowerMath to speed up the screen redraw and help prevent crashes. Quark Memory Increase Quark’s application memory preferred Size to 50. Disable PowerMath when Not In Use The PowerMath XTension stays in your XTension off folder. Keys ⌘=Command ⇪=Shift ⌥=Option ⌅=Control . It’s possible the superset should be modified so all the changes are quickly and consistently implemented. both desktop and proofreaders must follow the sample style.

Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal   71 Getting started with Powermath 1. Pull down the Utilities menu and select PowerMath Create Equation. The base point size of your equation will assume the size of whatever style is being used in Quark at the text insertion point. In the upper left corner of this window. e. This means the descenders will not be cut off in the display in Quark. and select Load Superset. Copy the job’s superset to your machine. This is a two-step process: 1. so you can now make screen captures and PDF files that include PowerMath. 2. Powermath 4 Preferences Click OK. highlight the corresponding Superset for the job and click Select. using the asterisk on the keypad. Place it in the appropriate PowerMath SuperSets folder. PowerMath tells you which Superset is loaded. enter 6. Build in extra space in the PowerMath anchored box so the border rule will clear the type. Change the Optical Pad Space from 0. Frames should be done within PowerMath so the ruled box flows along with the type. you need to load the job’s Superset. With the Content Tool. In the window. before starting an equation. You will see a message about missing fonts. located in the Preferences Folder in your System Folder. Pull down Style → Equation Box. At this point the Superset is Default.5 point. 4. Borders on Powermath Boxes If your project contains equations within bordered boxes. or ⌘⌥L. select the appropriate style from the Quark Style Sheets palette (generally it is eq. do not paste a framed box over the equation in Quark.g. for equation).) 6. But.“Planman” . 3. For example: 5. Confidential --. the preferences need to be set up so the Box Type is AutoCalc....5 points in the field. Pull down the Supersets menu. Apply the frame to the PowerMath anchored box in Quark.0 to the space per specs plus the width of the frame. Powermath Production techniques Quark style sheet Determines Base Point size Before starting a PowerMath equation. The PowerMath equation editing window will open. or type ⌘*. Also make sure Box Type is set to AutoCalc. (PowerMath automatically creates these folders. 2. click in a text box. In PowerMath 4. If the spec says add 6 points around the type and the frame width is .

Means in a single superset you can define 1024 characters. Integration or Radical.0 gksrk gSA remember 4 In a single time you can see the 256 character and by changing “Key” (⌘1. . special characters like a. b.fn gesa  dk symbol pkfg.sxkkA This is called list of complete characters. scaling etc 2.ksfd gesa  cukuk gS tks uk rks Greek Character gS vkSu uk gh a a dksbZ Summation. D. Confidential --. .  • Blue Character are unmaped and available for mapping according to the user.gk¡ rhu color ds characters display gks jgs gSA (Black. rks default superset esa black and Red characters dh configuration already set gksrh gS vkidks flQZ correct font select djuk gksrk gSA mudk tag name. gesa dksbZ Hkh Blue character select djuk gksxkA tSls gh vki dksbZ Hkh Blue character select djksxs “Tag” Field esa “pi. Step 6: vc ge okil vius  cukus ds process ij okil vkrs gSA vc D. Base line Step 3: Step 4: lcls igys vki show palette  ij click djsA tSls gh vki show palette ij click djsxas a a rks vkids lkeus colourful pi character chart display 4 gks tk.7)”.” tSlk dksbZ Hkh meaningless uke vk tk. you can see 256 3 4 5 1024 characters.  • Red Character are already defined for creating.kfu nwljs 'kCnksa esa dgk tk. a • Black Character are already defined for creating greek characters.“Planman” Step 7: . space left.3.⇧1. Radical and summation like . offset.72  typesetting   rules   and   regulations Pi Character selector (⌘⌥⇪ J) Pi Character dialogue box ls ge tks pkgsa character cuk ldrs gSaA For example . . Now go in the Pi character Selector dialogue box by pressing ⇪⌘⌥J. load that by pressing ⌘⌥L otherise create new superset by pressing ⌘⌥C. blfy. Red and Blue). right.xkA Now “Hide Palette”.5.  Step 5: . lc default :i ls igys gh set gksrk gS] vxj vki pkgsa rks mls viuh job ds vuqlkj modify dj 2 Character Configurations 3 ldrs gSA a ijUrq blue outline character dh dksbZ configuration set ugha gks j[kh gksrh gSA vFkkZr lkjh configuration field 2 esa 0. . 2. Integral. rks% Step 1: Step 2: Go to powermath menu by ⌘* (command + aestrick) Now if you have any pre-defined powermath superset. 3.

gk¡ apple dk symbol pkfg. • Copy to: ?????? • Set Palette PS: Set Palete Point Size. special characters like a. “Apple” click on “Save” then click on “Get”. D.g ”0” gh jgsxkA • Space Left/Right: This is the same option as we have in quark i.g scale “100.ksfd  ds nksuksa rjQ a a gesa regular space gh pkfg. sign or greek character etc.e. “kerning”. “base line shift”.0” jgsxkA Horizontal and Vertical Scale must be 100% for all pi characters.gk¡ .e. Means vxj vki character dks base line ds mij . i. Now you will see that all the configurations has already corrected by default. load that by pressing ⌘⌥L otherise create new superset by pressing ⌘⌥C.e. But if you create any character by using “Black Character which are already defined for creating greek characters. Confidential --. • Superior/Inferior Index and Level:These should be ‘0’ Step 10: Now give the name in the “Tag Field” 3 i.ksfd apple dk a symbol bl font esa vkrk gSA vc vki “Show Font” ij click djds required character select dj ldrs gSa tSls . Now go in the Pi character Selector dialogue box by pressing ⇪⌘⌥J.k D.●. .2. Now click on “Save” then click on “Get”.Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal   73 Step 8: Step 9: Click on “Edit” button.k ds fy. Integration and Radicaton like .g ”0” gh jgsxkA • Horizontal/Verticle cale: This is the same option as we have in quark i. So this was the process to create any new character by using “Blue Character fromPi Character Pallete”.ksfd  gesa base line a ij gh pkfg. . Now your Pi character has been created and powermath superset has been updated automatically. You can increase the point size of this palette by using this option. tSlk fd igys gh crk.k gS fd budh iwjh configuration igys gh set gksrh gS vkidks flQZ correct font yxkkuk gksrk gSA mnkgj. • Key: In a single time you can see the 256 character only and by changing “Key” (⌘1. you can see 256 3 4 5 1024 characters. g or select "ITC Zapf Dingbats” for ■. . You just need to change the font “characol” into “Mathematical Pi 1”. . geus symbol font blfy. Now change the “Font” Characol into “Symbol” and set all other preferences. blfy.knk djuk pkgsa rks dj ldrs gSA D.5.“Planman” .k T.ksfd  gesa regular size gh pkfg. • Output Character: Combination of Input character and font will be “output charcter”. vxj vkidks a cukuk gS rks vkidks .3. 8 with “MathPiOne” font 5 8. b.gk¡ .7)”. For example if you need to select “Mathematical Pi 1” for getting 1.4 or select “MathPiOne italic” for any greek charcter a.knk djuk pkgrs gSa rks blesa negative or positive esa value M+kyh tk ldrh gSA D. “Scale→horizontal/vertical”. 2. rks apple ij click dj nhft.s steps ysus gksx% a a s Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Step 4: Step 5: Step 6: tip short Command for getting any character from “Pi character Dialogue box”: “Key” (⌘1. Here 8 (degree) will be output.A apple ij click djrs gh “Output Character” esa  vk tk.k uhps set djuk pkgrs gSa rks blesa negative or positive value M+kyh tk ldrh gSA D. Now you will see that all the configuration option 2 has been activated. 3. Means vxj S vki character size dh height . select fd. Click on “Edit” button.3. “1” is input character for “1” and font will be “Mathematical Pi 1”.sxkkA vc lkjh configuration set dj nhft.0/100. Type “alp”.e. b. a a blfy.k T. i. By using same process you can create any new character. • Baseline Offset: This is the same option as we have in quark i.  or Red Character which are already defined for creating summation. Means vxj vki character ds left or right space dks de . blfy.✓.e.7) + Input Character Go to powermath menu by ⌘* (command + aestrick) Now if you have any pre-defined powermath superset. so that its must match with text pi characters. .3.A • Font: According to the character requirement. you will have to select the font. • Input Character: Which keyboard character is used for making the required symbol.  then process is so simple. Means in a single superset you can define 1024 characters.gk¡ . .k x.e. Your Pi character has created and powermath superset has also updated.5.k width dks de .

slh condition esa tc ge small parens “()” cukrs gSa rks opening peren “(” cukrs le. “ Auto Upsize End” dks activate er djukA Step 3: vc “)” cukrs le.kfu gesa ckj&ckj Pi character selector dialogue box esa tkus dh t:jr gh ugha iM+rhA auto Upsize start/end According to the situation gesa dqN characters dks NksVk . ge pi character selector dialogue box esa budks cukrs le.74  typesetting   rules   and   regulations auto remap dqN characters .. “ Auto Upsize Start” dks activate er djukA Step 4: vc “)” cukrs le.g automatically math font esa gh vkrk gSA .k + type djrs gSa rks .sls characters ds fy.ku jgs vki closing paren cukrs le.ku jgs vki opening paren cukrs le.s cM+k gh vklku gSA bls ge .d ckr dks /. summation .A a s blh izdkj nwljs character Hkh cuk. ijUrq vxj gesa fy[kuk gS rks paren cM+s pkfg. tkrs gSa tSls cMs Inegral. easy way to define BIG Parens.d ckr dks /.7)” dk font Hkh correct dj ysA a So this was the process of making big perens.k gS fd powermath esa lkjs character default :i ls cus cuk.fn gesa (x+y) fy[kuk gS rks parens NksVs pkfg.ku jgs cMh okyh perens vkids pi character selector dialogue box esa cuh gksuh pkfg. powermath will not work automatically. blls parens ges'kk gh mathematical font esa vk. “ Auto Upsize Start” dks activate dj nsA rkfd t:jr ds oDr vkidks cM+h opening paren a fey ldsA ysfdu .k x.sxA ij ?. integral. click on “ Auto remap on”. Summation. gksrs gSa tSls =. “ Auto Upsize End” dks activate dj nsA rkfd t:jr ds oDr a vkidks cM+h closing paren fey ldsA ysfdu . “ Auto Upsize End” dks activate dj nsA rkfd t:jr ds oDr a vkidks cM+h closing paren fey ldsA ysfdu . tSlk fd igys gh crk.k ls le>rs gSa %& eku ysrs gSa gesa cM+s parens cukus gSa Step 1: When you are making the small opening “(” and closing “(” paren in pi character menu.sxk Step 2: vc “(” cukrs le.ku jgs vki closing paren cukrs le. Then in that case you will have to call these big character by using this Pi Character Selector dialogue box.k radical cukus dh] rks .s okyh paren use dj ysxkA vkidks is dialogue box esa vkus dh t:jr ugha iM+xhA s s Step 6: blh izdkj vki “Key” (⌘5.s parens vius vki gh cM+s gks tk. + gesa ges'kk math font esa gh pkfg.sxk rks .d ckr dks /. big Integral or Big Radical. Confidential --. “ Auto Upsize Start” dks activate er djukA Step 5: vc vki “Key” ⌘3” select djsa vkSj flQZ Font Correct dj nsA vc tc Hkh t: a jr iM+xh powermath vius vki . gksrs gSA .s vkrs gSa vkidks flQZ mudk font change djuk gksrk gSA jgh ckr automatically big parens. gksrs gSA . Integral. See another example: These non-printable multicolor rules indicates that ‘auto upsize start’ is activated for this character (radical).“Planman” . Now by using same process you can excess big Summation.k cM+k ysuk gksrk gSA tSls . summation and radical. Auto remap a on dj ysrs gSa auto remap djus ij tc Hkh ge powermath esa = . But if you forget to click “Auto Upsize Start” in opening and “Auto Upsize End” for closing.d mnkgj.sls gksrs gSa tks gesa ges'kk fdlh spacial font esa gh pkfg.. Radical etc. Auto Upsize Start “On” dj ysrs gSa vkSj tc clsoing peren “)” cukrs gSa rks Auto Upsize End “On” dj ysrs gSA vc tc Hkh dksbZ equation esa division a vk.

k Fkk fd red characters are used for Integral.Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal   75 Integral Procedure (⌘⌥⇪ J) (⌘F+I) vHkh ftl izdkj geus Pi Character dialogue box ls dksbZ Hkh Character cukuk lh[kk gS mlh rjgk bl ckj ge blh Dialogue Box ls tks pkgsa Integral Character cukuk lh[ksaxsA blesa dqN Hkh u. But if you are going to create any new character like bigint.. • Space Left %: Space left effects the space between ‘integral sign’ and ‘text before integral sign’. rest of the configurations are pre-set in powermath. Integral signs are mostly created in “ISUIP or ISUIP 2k” font . Then it will take more steps: Step 1: Show Palette Step 2: Select Blue character (not black) Step 3: Hide Palette Step 4: Edit Step 5: Change Font Step 6: Show Font Step 7: Select required Character Step 8: Hide Font Step 9: Set Configuration • Baseline ffset %: By using Baseline Offset. As we have discussed earlier that we need to use correct font only.“Planman” . . Integral sign can get down/up of baseO line. It is used for proper alignment and spacing between integral sign with upper and lower limits (‘a’ and ‘b’).s gSaA Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Step 4: Type “int” in Tag field/Select any Red Redical Character from “show palette’ Edit Font change ‘Characol’ to ‘ISUIP2k’ Save it and Get it.kfd ge character cukuk igys gh lh[k pqds gSa blfy. smallint etc.gk¡ ge dsoy mUgha options dks detail esa lh[ksaxs tks u.k x. Confidential --. • Space Right %: Space Right effects the space between ‘integral’ sign and ‘limits’. which may have not pre-defined by ‘powermath pi character’. Summation and Radical.k blue character select djuk gSA tSlk fd igys crk.k ugha gSA vkidks bl ckj red . vc D.

These are preset configuration in the shape of “index” for the position of limits. For example if you need to create the integral sign then use hot command (⌘F + I). • Lower Limit Kern: It disturb the position of lowwer limit.d gh character 3 ckj pkfg. Summation and Radical change gksrs gSaA • Levles: It disturb the position of both the limits.ku nsus okyh gS fd . rks .s options According to the Integral.s ckr /.gk¡ .“Planman” .76  typesetting   rules   and   regulations • Horizontal and ertical Scale %: These effect the size of integral sign. It should be 3 otherwise integral sign will not display properly. so always edit them as per job requirement.d gh character dks fdruh Hkh ckj repeat dj ldrs gSaA tSls%& ysfdu .A bl izdkj vki . • Limit Index: It also disturb the position of both the limits. If you make your own integral with using blue character from “palette” Confidential --. These are used when you need to have a small integral sign. Step 11: “Save” it and “Get” it in powermath tip Short Command for getting integral from “Pi character Dialogue box”: “⌘F + I remember Powermath has its own hot commands. It should be set 3 otherwise lower limit will not set on position properly. then edit it as per need.gk¡ 3 insert dj nhft. Means vxj vkidks . V Step 10: Character Type:- Integral • Main Character Count: Repetation of character.

axhA • Space Right %: Space Right effects the space between ‘summation’ sign and ‘text after summation sign’.s gSaA Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Step 4: Type “sum” in Tag field/Select any Red Summation Character from “show palette’ Edit Font change ‘Characol’ to ‘ISUIP2k’ Save it and Get it.fn vkius cgqr T..ku jgs . which may have not pre-defined by ‘powermath pi character’. ij /. But if you are going to create any new character like bigsum. As we have discussed earlier that we need to use correct font only. ij /. Summation and Radical. smallsum etc.gk¡ ge dsoy mUgha options dks detail esa lh[ksaxs tks u.k blue character select djuk gSA tSlk fd igys crk.knk amount Mkyh tSls 75 rks nksauksa limits Hkh fgy tk.k x.“Planman” .knk amount Mkyh tSls 105 rks nksauksa limits Hkh fgy tk. vc D.kfd ge character cukuk igys gh lh[k pqds gSa blfy. Summation signs are mostly created in “ISUIP or ISUIP 2k” font .k Fkk fd red characters are used for Integral.Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal   77 summation Procedure (⌘⌥⇪ J) vc rd ge Pi Character dialogue box ls dksbZ Hkh Pi character vkSj Integral Character cukuk lh[k pqds gSaA vc bl ckj ge blh Dialogue Box ls tks pkgsa Summation Character cukuk lh[ksaxsA bls cukus dk rjhdk Hkh yxHkx Integral cukus tSlk gh gSA vkidks bl ckj Hkh red .ku jgs . • Space Left %: Space left effects the space between ‘summation sign’ and ‘text before summation sign’. Summation sign can get down/up of baseline.axhA Confidential --. rest of the configurations are pre-set in powermath. . It is used for proper alignment and spacing between summation sign with upper and lower limits (‘a’ and ‘b’). Then it will take the following steps: Step 1: Show Palette Step 2: Step 3: Step 4: Step 5: Step 6: Step 7: Step 8: Step 9: Select Blue character (not black) Hide Palette Edit Change Font Show Font Select required Character (summation) Hide Font Set Configuration • Baseline Offset %: By using Baseline Offset.fn vkius cgqr T.

78  typesetting   rules   and   regulations • Horizontal and ertical Scale %: These effect the size of integral sign. These are used when you need to have a small summation sign. It should be 3 otherwise summation sign will not display properly.d gh character dks fdruh Hkh ckj repeat dj ldrs gSaA tSls%& • Levles: It disturbs the position of both the limits. Select Summation get it in powermath window. Different type of summation Confidential --.“Planman” . rks . These are preset configuration in the shape of “index” for the position of limits. Step 11: “Save” it and “Get” it in powermath set the position of limit(s) By using “Summation Selector (⌘⌥E)”. Step 1: Step 2: Step 3 go to “Summation Selector” and choose limit aligment option now go to “Pi Character Sector”. • Limit Index: It also disturb the position of both the limits.gk¡ 3 insert dj nhft. Means vxj vkidks .d gh character 3 ckj pkfg. V Step 10: Character Type:- Summation • Main Character Count: Repetation of character.A bl izdkj vki . we can fix the alignment of limits.

• Space Left %: Space left effects the space between ‘summation sign’ and ‘text before summation sign’. Radical sign can get down/up of baseline. But if you are going to create any new character which is not pre-defined by powermath pi character. Then it will take the following steps: Step 1: Show Palette Step 2: Select Blue character (not black) Step 3: Hide Palette Step 4: Edit Step 5: Change Font Step 6: Show Font Step 7: Select required Character Step 8: Hide Font Step 9: Set Configuration • Baseline Offset %: By using Baseline Offset. • Space Right %: Space Right effects the space between ‘summation sign’ and ‘summation rule”.k Fkk fd red characters are used for Integral. Integral Character vkSj Summation Character cukuk lh[k pqds gSaA vc bl ckj ge blh Dialogue Box ls tks pkgsa Radical Character cukuk lh[ksaxsA bls cukus dk rjhdk Hkh yxHkx Integral and Summation cukus tSlk gh gSA vkidks bl ckj Hkh red .k x.gk¡ ge dsoy mUgha options dks detail esa lh[ksaxs tks u.k blue character select djuk gSA tSlk fd igys crk.s gSaA Step 1: Step 2: Step 3: Step 4: Type “rad” in Tag field/Select any Red Radical Character from “show palette’ Edit Font change ‘Characol’ to ‘Rads2k’ Save it and Get it. . • Horizontal and ertical Scale %: These effect the size of summation sign. V Confidential --. Rest of the configurations are pre-set in powermath. Summation and Radical.“Planman” .Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal   79 radical Procedure (⌘r) vc rd ge Pi Character dialogue box ls dksbZ Hkh Pi character. As we have discussed earlier that we need to change correct only font. vc D.kfd ge character cukuk igys gh lh[k pqds gSa blfy. Summation signs are mostly created in “Rads or Rads2k” font .

gks rks vki igyh limit type djus ds ckn ⌘L press dj nsaA cursor vius vki nwljh stack limit ij pyk tk.s gS fd . Step 11: “Save” it and “Get” it in powermath rks vc ge dksbZ Hkh Pi character (up to 1024) vklkuh ls cuk ldrs gSaA tSls%& Greek character Math Signs Special Character like accent characterss Integral Equations Summation Equations Radical Equations. It must be properly aligned.“Planman” .knk ckj .etc stack Limit: superior/Inferior selector (⌘⌥⇪ =)(⌘L) eku yks vkidks dqN bl rjg dh equations fy[kuh gS%& bl equation esa [kkl ckr . By using this option you can set the proper alignment of ‘radical sign’ and ‘radical rule’...xkA tc vki mij okyh limit ij gksaxs rks stacking vius vki mij gksxh vkSj tc vki uhps okyh limit ij gksaxs rks stacking vius vki uhps gksxhA vc ge le>saxs fd budh .gk¡ limit 1 ls T. • Rule Kern: It moves the position of ‘radical rule’ horizontally. By using this option you butt the ‘radical sign’ and ‘radical rule’ properly. While inside a limit field within the summation or integral procedure you can use a command ⌘L which will automatically stack the limits above (if you are in a top limit) or below (if you are in a bottom limit).kfu stack limits dh configration setting dgk¡ ls gksrh gSA Confidential --.d gh txg ij mij . eryc fd bls cukus dk rjhdk cgqr vklku gSA tc Hkh vki igyh limit field ij gksa vkSj vkidks ogha nwljh stack limit pkfg.k uhps vk jgh gSaA bUgsa stack limits dgk tkrk gSA You can stack the limits by Stack Limit Procedure in PowerMath.80  typesetting   rules   and   regulations Step 10: Character Type:- Radical • Rule Weight: By this you can fix the width of ‘radical rule’ • Rule Offset: It moves the position of ‘radical rule’ vertically.

Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal   81 set the Configuration of Limits In this dialogue box powermath provides pre-defined configured 20 styles of superior and inferior. we will just go in the Macro Selector Dialogue box and select this macro. |deg|~rom~C~norm~ Now whenever we will need ‘8C’. Either you can use them as they are or edit them as per job requirement.0 not confirm What is the meaning of this macro Procedure (⌘⌥⇪ I) In this option of powermath. you can set repetitive keystrokes as a macro. Often we see that there are some characters or equations are coming again and again. You can not create any new style. Ultimetly we will get this combinatin of character. Each macro can contain up to 256 characters. • Superior/Inferior Offset: It effects the This is position of limit • Pi Space: It should be 20. Here we will learn how do we set the configuration:• Point Size/Set Width%: This is the size of limit. Up to 100 macros can be defined. We define that equation or part of equation as macro For example we need ‘8C’ (degreeC) character again and again. In that case we need not type them everytime.“Planman” . Confidential --.

vki . Leading will be 12+2. In general. But for matching with leading you will have to change it into 60%.k gS blds ckjs esa ld>saxs :A matrix is a collection of numbers arranged into a fixed number of rows and columns. Your matrix is ready. This matrix is a 333 matrix because it has three rows and three columns.“Planman” . Usually the numbers are real numbers. In describing matrices. Gutter Width: 120% Gutter Width: 60% Number of Rows/Column: vkidks ftrus by ftrus dh matrix pkfg.The upper left corner of the matrix is row 1 column 1.gk¡ ls define dj ldrs gSaA 133 333 233 232 After selecting/fixing these preference of matrix. press “⌘⇪L” (Math Level Offset%). Here is an example of a matrix with three rows and three columns: column 1 row 1 The top row is row 1. matrices can contain complex numbers also. By defalt it is set 70%. The elements in a matrix have specific locations. The element at row 2 column 3 is the value 4. blls igys dh ge dksb Matrix cuk. Compute Row Widths: Row Width: bldks set djus dk option fcYdqy gh vyx tkdj gksrk gSA For setting the Row Width. In the above matrix the element at row 1 col 1 is the value 1.82  typesetting   rules   and   regulations matrix Procedure (⌘⌥⇪ m)(⌘m) vc ge Matrix cukuk lh[kasxsA lcls igys rks ge Matrix gksrh D. Left. See the example below: Row Width: 70% Row Width: 60% Confidential --. For example if point size/leading of equation is 10/12 then in matrix you need to set block leading 12.sa ge Matrix Option dks le> ysrs gSaA Input: Across/Down and Down/Across: matrix vkidks fdl rjg type vFkkZr cukuh gSA ercy fd vki pkgsa rks row wise cuk ldrs gSa vkSj pkgsa rks column wise cuk ldrs gSaA See the examples in right Align Columns: Center. But if you select 70% (level). Right By these options we can fix the alignment of element in a matrix Center Left Right Across/Down Down/Across Compute Column Widths: Gutter Width: By this option we can fix the spacing between columns. the format is: rows 3 columns Each number that makes up a matrix is called an element of the matrix. The leftmost column is column 1. type the elements of matrix. So you will have to change it to 60% for getting leading 12 within matrix.6.

r% . in type size. arrays etc. This is used in built up fractions (from base of numerator to base of denominator) and in matrices. meaning of Division/Fractions When a numerater and denominater are separated by a math slash (Solidus) or horizontal bar is called Fraction. Build-up or Stacked Fraction: Full size (normal size) numerator and denominator separated by a horizontal rule/bar is termed as built-up (stack) fraction. we can get base to base Fraction/Block Leading. e. Max space above rule: 5. e.0 Max space below rule: 5.g.Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal   83 Division/Fraction Procedure (⌘⌥⇪ D)(⌘D) Division/Fraction Selector Dialogue Box gives you readymade 20 different division/fraction setup.g.: Block Leading  a11 a  21 a12  a22   1 2 Fraction Leading Division option: Division Rule Weight: division ds rule dh thickness. lkekU.0 Min space above rule: 2. e. 1 2 Heavy Fraction: Two built-up fraction included in a fraction as a numerator and denominator is known as heavy fraction.g.0 Confidential --. You can not create any new case fraction. You can only modify them according to the job.k tkrk gSA Rule Color: Optical Spacing to Division Bar: oSls rks rule ls numerator and denominator dh spacing “Rule Offset” ds )kjk set dh tkrh gS ijUrq vki .5 gksrh gSA Division Rule Offset: division rule ls numerator/denominator dh nwjh bl option ls fix dh tkrh gSA Division Rule Overhang: blls rule dh width dks adjust fd.“Planman” .gk¡ ls maximum or minimum spacing fix dj ldrs gksA Here are the standard spacing.0 Min space below rule: 2.: b 2 − 4ac −b ± b 2 − 4ac 2a Fraction/Block Leading: By adding 4 pts.g 3.

gk¡ positive value M+kyuh gksxhA Math Rule End Offset: It is the Ending point of rule. Means vxj vkidks base text ls Åij rule j[kuk gS rks . If you need a case fraction without rule. You can only modify them according to the job. math rule options: Math Rule Offset: It is the starting point of rule.“Planman” . Math Rule Selector Dialogue Box gives you readymade 20 different “rule setup”.0 value M+kyuh gksxh vkSj uhps ls Åij ds fy. e. Means vxj vkidks base text ls Åij lh/kk straight rule j[kuk gS rks . multiple rule”. You can not create any new case fraction. .gk¡ positive value M+kyuh gksxhA vxj vkidks base text ls uhps rule j[kuk gS rks .gk¡ 0.gk¡ negative value M+kyuh gksxh vkSj uhps ls Åij ds fy. Rest of the options are same. Point Size: As per standard it should be 65% of basal text point size.gk¡ negative value M+kyuh gksxhA vxj vkidks base text ls cancilation/diagonal rule pkfg. then make a seprate setup for that and fill “rule weight % 0” math rule selector (⌘⌥⇪ Y)(⌘Y) By this option we can set “under bar.gk¡ Hkh mruh gh positive value M+kyuh gksxh ftruh vkius Math Rule Offset esa M+kyh FkhA vxj vkidks base text ls uhps straight rule j[kuk gS rks . cancilation.gk¡ positive value M+kyuh gksxhA Rest of the options are Rule Weight and Rule Color which will be selected as per job recuirement.: 1 2 Case Fraction options: These Option are almost same as we have discussed in “Divisions/Fraction Procedure”. Confidential --. rks Åij ls uhps ds fy. .gk¡ Hkh mruh gh negative value M+kyuh gksxh ftruh vkius Math Rule Offset esa M+kyh FkhA vxj vkidks base text ls can cilation/diagonal rule pkfg. rks Åij ls uhps ds fy. .g. . over bar.84  typesetting   rules   and   regulations Case Fraction Procedure (⌘⌥⇪ h)(⌘h) Case Fraction Selector Dialogue Box gives you readymade 20 different case fraction setup. You can see the standard value of “case fraction selector” in the snapshot which is given here. There is only one difference and that is “point size”. You can only modify them according to the job. meaning of Case Fractions Case Fraction: Index size numerator and denominator separated by a horizontal rule/bar is called the case fraction. You can not create any new rule.

styles selector (⌘⌥⇪ s) Alternate Style Selector Dialogue Box provides readymade 10 different “character configuration styles”.. For example if you created a style “bf ” with index “4” then whenever you will type anything after pressing “⌘4”.. bold according to the job.etc. fancy. For this purpose we will click alpha “Times Italic” and non-alpha “Times-Roman”. it will be typed in bold face.. boldface. Split Alpha/Non Alpha: If we activate this option then “Non-Alpha” will be activated. Index: It is used to set a short command which run with command key. You can not create any new style except those. dfdfd t dfdfd Confidential --. greek. You can only modify them for italic. Thus we will get all alphabets italic and all numeric values “Roman.Compiled by:     deepak   aggarwal   85 Few Examples of Math Rule Options Name of tag equation math rule options obar ubar can dcan ducan Before typing the equation select both the options “obar” and “ubar”. italic. as per job recuirement. bfit.“Planman” . symbol. So now you can set the styles for “roman. Just see the example below: In this equation we need x and y italic and ‘0’ in roman.

rks 3 M+ky nhft.slh condition es ge Force Level dk use djrs gSaA By default . .gk¡ Åij okyh field dkQh uhps vk jgh gS yxHkx fpid lh jgh gSA blfy. rhu Force Level negative value esa M+ky nhft.“Planman” .A blh izdkj vki uhps ds fy. stacking options Alignment: You can select the option as per your requirement. rhu line Åij pkfg.k uhps dj ldrs gSaA vkSj baseline ls “with positive” bldk rjhdk . below or both. You can create a stack that enables all three or any combination of two. Either Center.s 0 (vFkkZr base line ij set) gqvk jgrk gSA vxj vkidks . rks Force Level value 1.s base line ls Åij .A blh izdkj t:jr iM+us ij vki uhps dh field expected Fields You can positioned the characters above. Confidential --. Left or Right.s gS fd vki igys “with positive” vFkkZr Åij okyh field dks select djsa fQj tc rd dh mldh position fcYdqy Bhd uk gks tk.) dHkh dHkh gesa equation ds fdlh part dks fcuk point size reduced fd.¡ dks Hkh Åij . vkidks dks mannually FkksMk lk Åij djuk gksxkA “control+up arrow” press djrs pys tk.86  typesetting   rules   and   regulations Force Level (⌘.A with level 1 with level 0 stacking (⌘⌥⇪ t)(⌘t) Stacking procedure allows characters to be positioned above or below the baseline and horizontally aligned including or excluding content along the baseline.d line Åij pkfg.k uhps set djus dh t:jr gksrh gSA .

1 iMac G5 10.3 Front View of iMac G5 10.6 Keyboard of G5 with Symbol .G5 Overview 10.2 Inserting a CD or DVD Disc 10.10 Macintosh .5 Desktop of iMac G5 10.4 Back View of iMac G5 10.

Using Your Optical Drive

Your iMac G5 has a SuperDrive, which you can use to install software f DVDs, play music from audio CDs, and play DVD movies. You can also b movies to make video DVDs that can be played in most home DVD pla Your iMac G5 has been designed so that you can set it up quieckly and start using it right away. If you have never used an iMac burn music CDs that can play in most CD players, and save documents G5 or are new to Macintosh computers, read this section for instructions on getting started. files to blank CD-R, CD-RW, DVD±R, DVD±RW, and DVD+R Double Laye using the Finder. You can store nearly twice as much data (up to 8.54 G Picture of iMac G5 DL disc.

Overview

Important: The optical drive on your iMac G5 supports standard circul Irregularly shaped discs or discs smaller than 12 cm are not supported. small discs may become lodged in the drive. If a disc becomes lodged the troubleshooting information on page 57.

Note: If you have older software that comes on floppy disks, contact th manufacturer to see if the software is available on a CD or for downloa or purchase an external USB floppy disk drive for your iMac G5 from an Authorized Reseller, an Apple Store retail location, or the online Apple www.apple.com/store.

Inserting a CD or DVD Disc

To install or use programs from a CD or DVD disc, follow these steps 1 Place the disc into the optical drive with the label facing you.

2 When the icon for the disc appears on the desktop, the disc is ready to Note: Some DVD discs are two-sided.

inserting a cD or DVD Disc
To install or use programs from a CD or DVD disc, follow these steps: 1. Place the disc into the optical drive with the label facing you. 2. When the icon for the disc appears on the desktop, the disc is ready to use.

Chapter 3 Using Your iMac G5

Compiled by:  

deepak   aggarwal   

Front View
Front View G5
Built-in microphone Built-in iSight video camera Video camera indicator light Slot-load optical disc drive Integrated infrared (IR) receiver

Power indicator light Built-in speaker Remote rest

Ambient light sensor

Built-in speaker

- Volume controls

d USB ports

C Media Eject key

Apple Keyboard

Remote

MENU

Mighty Mouse

Back View

Back View G5

£ Video out port

G Ethernet port
(10/100/1000Base-T)

, Audio line-in port

Power port

f

optical out

Headphone out/ optical audio out port
12 Chapter 2 Getting to Know Your iMac G5

® Power buton

d

USB 2.0 ports (3)

H

FireWire ports (2)

Memory access

Security slot

Confidential --- “Publishing Services”

 

typesetting   rules   and   regulations

Desktop of G5

Keyboard of G5 with symbol

Confidential --- “Publishing Services”

5 1 1.5 0.5 3 3.INCH 0 1/8 MM 0 5 RULE 6 LEADING 0 1 2 3 PICA 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 7 25 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 8 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 SCREEN 9 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1/8 10 100% 95% 90% 85% 80% 75% 70% 65% 60% 55% 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 BULLET 125 1/8 1/4 3/8 31 32 1/2 5/8 11 7 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 3/4 7/8 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 12 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8 13 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 14 3/4 7/8 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 15 63 64 65 66 67 68 3/4 7/8 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8 Planman  Technologies Knowledge 69 70 71 72 3/4 7/8 • IT • Outsourcing D-103. Okhla Industrial Area.2 0. 2006 0 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150 156 162 168 174 180 186 192 198 204 210 216 222 228 234 240 246 252 258 264 270 276 282 288 294 300 306 312 318 324 330 336 342 348 354 360 366 372 378 384 390 396 402 408 414 420 426 432 438 444 450 456 462 468 474 480 486 492 498 504 510 516 522 528 534 540 546 552 558 564 570 576 582 588 594 600 606 612 618 624 630 636 642 648 654 660 666 672 678 684 690 696 702 708 714 720 726 732 738 744 750 756 762 768 774 780 786 792 798 804 810 816 822 828 834 840 846 852 858 864 POINT 10 15 20 1 30 40 50 2 3 80 90 100 4 5 130 140 150 6 7 8 210 220 230 9 10 260 270 11 12 240 250 160 170 180 190 200 110 120 60 70 35 45 55 65 12 10 8 6 5 4.5 2 2. New Delhi-20 20 Nov. Phase 1.5 4 75 85 50% 45% 40% 35% 30% 25% 20% 15% 10% 5% 95 105 115 135 145 155 165 175 185 195 205 215 225 235 245 255 265 10 48 54 60 72 84 9 30 36 42 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 U E E s e E 8 e E 9 e E E E 10 e E 12 POINT SIZE (Myriad Pro) e E E 14 e E 16 e EEE E 18 e E 20 22 24 E e E e E e .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful